Add support to readelf for reading NetBSD ELF core notes.
[deliverable/binutils-gdb.git] / ld / ld.texinfo
CommitLineData
252b5132
RH
1\input texinfo
2@setfilename ld.info
b90efa5b 3@c Copyright (C) 1991-2015 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 4@syncodeindex ky cp
dff70155 5@c man begin INCLUDE
252b5132
RH
6@include configdoc.texi
7@c (configdoc.texi is generated by the Makefile)
c428fa83 8@include bfdver.texi
dff70155 9@c man end
252b5132
RH
10
11@c @smallbook
12
ff5dcc92
SC
13@macro gcctabopt{body}
14@code{\body\}
15@end macro
16
0285c67d
NC
17@c man begin NAME
18@ifset man
19@c Configure for the generation of man pages
20@set UsesEnvVars
21@set GENERIC
0285c67d 22@set ARM
ac145307 23@set C6X
49fa1e15 24@set H8300
0285c67d 25@set HPPA
0285c67d 26@set I960
0285c67d 27@set M68HC11
7fb9f789 28@set M68K
833794fc 29@set MIPS
3c3bdf30 30@set MMIX
2469cfa2 31@set MSP430
35c08157 32@set NDS32
78058a5e 33@set NIOSII
2a60a7a8
AM
34@set POWERPC
35@set POWERPC64
49fa1e15
AM
36@set Renesas
37@set SPU
38@set TICOFF
2ca22b03 39@set WIN32
e0001a05 40@set XTENSA
0285c67d
NC
41@end ifset
42@c man end
43
9160ea82
AM
44@ifnottex
45@dircategory Software development
46@direntry
252b5132 47* Ld: (ld). The GNU linker.
9160ea82
AM
48@end direntry
49@end ifnottex
252b5132 50
0e9517a9 51@copying
e49e529d
JM
52This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker LD
53@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
54@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
55@end ifset
56version @value{VERSION}.
252b5132 57
b90efa5b 58Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2015 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 59
cf055d54 60Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
793c5807 61under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
cf055d54
NC
62or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
63with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
64Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
36f63dca 65section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
0e9517a9 66@end copying
252b5132
RH
67@iftex
68@finalout
69@setchapternewpage odd
71ba23f6 70@settitle The GNU linker
252b5132 71@titlepage
71ba23f6 72@title The GNU linker
252b5132 73@sp 1
e49e529d
JM
74@subtitle @code{ld}
75@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
76@subtitle @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
77@end ifset
252b5132
RH
78@subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
79@author Steve Chamberlain
80@author Ian Lance Taylor
252b5132
RH
81@page
82
83@tex
84{\parskip=0pt
704c465c
NC
85\hfill Red Hat Inc\par
86\hfill nickc\@credhat.com, doc\@redhat.com\par
71ba23f6 87\hfill {\it The GNU linker}\par
252b5132
RH
88\hfill Edited by Jeffrey Osier (jeffrey\@cygnus.com)\par
89}
90\global\parindent=0pt % Steve likes it this way.
91@end tex
92
93@vskip 0pt plus 1filll
0285c67d 94@c man begin COPYRIGHT
b90efa5b 95Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2015 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 96
0285c67d 97Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
793c5807 98under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
0285c67d
NC
99or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
100with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
101Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
36f63dca 102section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
0285c67d 103@c man end
252b5132 104
252b5132
RH
105@end titlepage
106@end iftex
4ecceb71 107@contents
252b5132
RH
108@c FIXME: Talk about importance of *order* of args, cmds to linker!
109
84ec0e6d 110@ifnottex
252b5132 111@node Top
71ba23f6 112@top LD
e49e529d
JM
113This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker ld
114@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
115@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
116@end ifset
117version @value{VERSION}.
252b5132 118
cf055d54 119This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
793c5807
NC
120Documentation License version 1.3. A copy of the license is included
121in the section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
cf055d54 122
252b5132
RH
123@menu
124* Overview:: Overview
125* Invocation:: Invocation
126* Scripts:: Linker Scripts
127@ifset GENERIC
128* Machine Dependent:: Machine Dependent Features
129@end ifset
130@ifclear GENERIC
131@ifset H8300
132* H8/300:: ld and the H8/300
133@end ifset
c2dcd04e
NC
134@ifset Renesas
135* Renesas:: ld and other Renesas micros
252b5132
RH
136@end ifset
137@ifset I960
138* i960:: ld and the Intel 960 family
139@end ifset
36f63dca
NC
140@ifset ARM
141* ARM:: ld and the ARM family
142@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
143@ifset M68HC11
144* M68HC11/68HC12:: ld and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
145@end ifset
7ca01ed9
NC
146@ifset HPPA
147* HPPA ELF32:: ld and HPPA 32-bit ELF
148@end ifset
7fb9f789
NC
149@ifset M68K
150* M68K:: ld and Motorola 68K family
151@end ifset
833794fc
MR
152@ifset MIPS
153* MIPS:: ld and MIPS family
154@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
155@ifset POWERPC
156* PowerPC ELF32:: ld and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
157@end ifset
158@ifset POWERPC64
159* PowerPC64 ELF64:: ld and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
160@end ifset
49fa1e15
AM
161@ifset SPU
162* SPU ELF:: ld and SPU ELF Support
163@end ifset
74459f0e
TW
164@ifset TICOFF
165* TI COFF:: ld and the TI COFF
166@end ifset
2ca22b03
NC
167@ifset WIN32
168* Win32:: ld and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
169@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
170@ifset XTENSA
171* Xtensa:: ld and Xtensa Processors
172@end ifset
252b5132
RH
173@end ifclear
174@ifclear SingleFormat
175* BFD:: BFD
176@end ifclear
177@c Following blank line required for remaining bug in makeinfo conds/menus
178
179* Reporting Bugs:: Reporting Bugs
180* MRI:: MRI Compatible Script Files
704c465c 181* GNU Free Documentation License:: GNU Free Documentation License
370b66a1 182* LD Index:: LD Index
252b5132 183@end menu
84ec0e6d 184@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
185
186@node Overview
187@chapter Overview
188
189@cindex @sc{gnu} linker
190@cindex what is this?
0285c67d 191
0879a67a 192@ifset man
0285c67d 193@c man begin SYNOPSIS
ff5dcc92 194ld [@b{options}] @var{objfile} @dots{}
0285c67d
NC
195@c man end
196
197@c man begin SEEALSO
198ar(1), nm(1), objcopy(1), objdump(1), readelf(1) and
199the Info entries for @file{binutils} and
200@file{ld}.
201@c man end
202@end ifset
203
204@c man begin DESCRIPTION
205
ff5dcc92 206@command{ld} combines a number of object and archive files, relocates
252b5132 207their data and ties up symbol references. Usually the last step in
ff5dcc92 208compiling a program is to run @command{ld}.
252b5132 209
ff5dcc92 210@command{ld} accepts Linker Command Language files written in
252b5132
RH
211a superset of AT&T's Link Editor Command Language syntax,
212to provide explicit and total control over the linking process.
213
0285c67d
NC
214@ifset man
215@c For the man only
ece2d90e 216This man page does not describe the command language; see the
71ba23f6
NC
217@command{ld} entry in @code{info} for full details on the command
218language and on other aspects of the GNU linker.
0285c67d
NC
219@end ifset
220
252b5132 221@ifclear SingleFormat
ff5dcc92
SC
222This version of @command{ld} uses the general purpose BFD libraries
223to operate on object files. This allows @command{ld} to read, combine, and
252b5132
RH
224write object files in many different formats---for example, COFF or
225@code{a.out}. Different formats may be linked together to produce any
226available kind of object file. @xref{BFD}, for more information.
227@end ifclear
228
229Aside from its flexibility, the @sc{gnu} linker is more helpful than other
230linkers in providing diagnostic information. Many linkers abandon
231execution immediately upon encountering an error; whenever possible,
ff5dcc92 232@command{ld} continues executing, allowing you to identify other errors
252b5132
RH
233(or, in some cases, to get an output file in spite of the error).
234
0285c67d
NC
235@c man end
236
252b5132
RH
237@node Invocation
238@chapter Invocation
239
0285c67d
NC
240@c man begin DESCRIPTION
241
ff5dcc92 242The @sc{gnu} linker @command{ld} is meant to cover a broad range of situations,
252b5132
RH
243and to be as compatible as possible with other linkers. As a result,
244you have many choices to control its behavior.
245
0285c67d
NC
246@c man end
247
252b5132
RH
248@ifset UsesEnvVars
249@menu
250* Options:: Command Line Options
251* Environment:: Environment Variables
252@end menu
253
254@node Options
255@section Command Line Options
256@end ifset
257
258@cindex command line
259@cindex options
0285c67d
NC
260
261@c man begin OPTIONS
262
252b5132
RH
263The linker supports a plethora of command-line options, but in actual
264practice few of them are used in any particular context.
265@cindex standard Unix system
ff5dcc92 266For instance, a frequent use of @command{ld} is to link standard Unix
252b5132
RH
267object files on a standard, supported Unix system. On such a system, to
268link a file @code{hello.o}:
269
270@smallexample
271ld -o @var{output} /lib/crt0.o hello.o -lc
272@end smallexample
273
ff5dcc92 274This tells @command{ld} to produce a file called @var{output} as the
252b5132
RH
275result of linking the file @code{/lib/crt0.o} with @code{hello.o} and
276the library @code{libc.a}, which will come from the standard search
277directories. (See the discussion of the @samp{-l} option below.)
278
ff5dcc92 279Some of the command-line options to @command{ld} may be specified at any
511ab9e9
ILT
280point in the command line. However, options which refer to files, such
281as @samp{-l} or @samp{-T}, cause the file to be read at the point at
282which the option appears in the command line, relative to the object
283files and other file options. Repeating non-file options with a
284different argument will either have no further effect, or override prior
252b5132
RH
285occurrences (those further to the left on the command line) of that
286option. Options which may be meaningfully specified more than once are
287noted in the descriptions below.
288
289@cindex object files
511ab9e9
ILT
290Non-option arguments are object files or archives which are to be linked
291together. They may follow, precede, or be mixed in with command-line
292options, except that an object file argument may not be placed between
293an option and its argument.
252b5132
RH
294
295Usually the linker is invoked with at least one object file, but you can
296specify other forms of binary input files using @samp{-l}, @samp{-R},
297and the script command language. If @emph{no} binary input files at all
298are specified, the linker does not produce any output, and issues the
299message @samp{No input files}.
300
36f63dca 301If the linker cannot recognize the format of an object file, it will
252b5132
RH
302assume that it is a linker script. A script specified in this way
303augments the main linker script used for the link (either the default
304linker script or the one specified by using @samp{-T}). This feature
305permits the linker to link against a file which appears to be an object
306or an archive, but actually merely defines some symbol values, or uses
53d25da6
AM
307@code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} to load other objects. Specifying a
308script in this way merely augments the main linker script, with the
309extra commands placed after the main script; use the @samp{-T} option
310to replace the default linker script entirely, but note the effect of
311the @code{INSERT} command. @xref{Scripts}.
252b5132
RH
312
313For options whose names are a single letter,
314option arguments must either follow the option letter without intervening
315whitespace, or be given as separate arguments immediately following the
316option that requires them.
317
318For options whose names are multiple letters, either one dash or two can
e4897a32 319precede the option name; for example, @samp{-trace-symbol} and
36f63dca 320@samp{--trace-symbol} are equivalent. Note---there is one exception to
e4897a32 321this rule. Multiple letter options that start with a lower case 'o' can
ba1be17e 322only be preceded by two dashes. This is to reduce confusion with the
e4897a32
NC
323@samp{-o} option. So for example @samp{-omagic} sets the output file
324name to @samp{magic} whereas @samp{--omagic} sets the NMAGIC flag on the
325output.
326
327Arguments to multiple-letter options must either be separated from the
328option name by an equals sign, or be given as separate arguments
329immediately following the option that requires them. For example,
330@samp{--trace-symbol foo} and @samp{--trace-symbol=foo} are equivalent.
331Unique abbreviations of the names of multiple-letter options are
332accepted.
252b5132 333
36f63dca
NC
334Note---if the linker is being invoked indirectly, via a compiler driver
335(e.g. @samp{gcc}) then all the linker command line options should be
fa19fce0
NC
336prefixed by @samp{-Wl,} (or whatever is appropriate for the particular
337compiler driver) like this:
4e53152f
NC
338
339@smallexample
2509a395 340 gcc -Wl,--start-group foo.o bar.o -Wl,--end-group
4e53152f
NC
341@end smallexample
342
343This is important, because otherwise the compiler driver program may
2509a395
SL
344silently drop the linker options, resulting in a bad link. Confusion
345may also arise when passing options that require values through a
346driver, as the use of a space between option and argument acts as
347a separator, and causes the driver to pass only the option to the linker
348and the argument to the compiler. In this case, it is simplest to use
349the joined forms of both single- and multiple-letter options, such as:
350
351@smallexample
352 gcc foo.o bar.o -Wl,-eENTRY -Wl,-Map=a.map
353@end smallexample
4e53152f
NC
354
355Here is a table of the generic command line switches accepted by the GNU
356linker:
357
ff5dcc92 358@table @gcctabopt
38fc1cb1 359@include at-file.texi
dff70155 360
2509a395
SL
361@kindex -a @var{keyword}
362@item -a @var{keyword}
252b5132
RH
363This option is supported for HP/UX compatibility. The @var{keyword}
364argument must be one of the strings @samp{archive}, @samp{shared}, or
365@samp{default}. @samp{-aarchive} is functionally equivalent to
366@samp{-Bstatic}, and the other two keywords are functionally equivalent
367to @samp{-Bdynamic}. This option may be used any number of times.
368
7ee314fa
AM
369@kindex --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
370@item --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
371Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_AUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
372@var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
373specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_AUDIT}
374will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. If the linker
375finds an object with an audit entry while searching for shared libraries,
9d5777a3 376it will add a corresponding @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry in the output file.
7ee314fa 377This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit
9d5777a3 378interface.
7ee314fa 379
252b5132
RH
380@ifset I960
381@cindex architectures
2509a395
SL
382@kindex -A @var{arch}
383@item -A @var{architecture}
252b5132
RH
384@kindex --architecture=@var{arch}
385@itemx --architecture=@var{architecture}
ff5dcc92
SC
386In the current release of @command{ld}, this option is useful only for the
387Intel 960 family of architectures. In that @command{ld} configuration, the
252b5132
RH
388@var{architecture} argument identifies the particular architecture in
389the 960 family, enabling some safeguards and modifying the
ff5dcc92 390archive-library search path. @xref{i960,,@command{ld} and the Intel 960
252b5132
RH
391family}, for details.
392
ff5dcc92 393Future releases of @command{ld} may support similar functionality for
252b5132
RH
394other architecture families.
395@end ifset
396
397@ifclear SingleFormat
398@cindex binary input format
399@kindex -b @var{format}
400@kindex --format=@var{format}
401@cindex input format
402@cindex input format
403@item -b @var{input-format}
404@itemx --format=@var{input-format}
ff5dcc92
SC
405@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
406file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
252b5132 407@samp{-b} option to specify the binary format for input object files
ff5dcc92 408that follow this option on the command line. Even when @command{ld} is
252b5132 409configured to support alternative object formats, you don't usually need
ff5dcc92 410to specify this, as @command{ld} should be configured to expect as a
252b5132
RH
411default input format the most usual format on each machine.
412@var{input-format} is a text string, the name of a particular format
413supported by the BFD libraries. (You can list the available binary
414formats with @samp{objdump -i}.)
415@xref{BFD}.
416
417You may want to use this option if you are linking files with an unusual
418binary format. You can also use @samp{-b} to switch formats explicitly (when
419linking object files of different formats), by including
420@samp{-b @var{input-format}} before each group of object files in a
a1ab1d2a 421particular format.
252b5132
RH
422
423The default format is taken from the environment variable
424@code{GNUTARGET}.
425@ifset UsesEnvVars
426@xref{Environment}.
427@end ifset
428You can also define the input format from a script, using the command
0285c67d
NC
429@code{TARGET};
430@ifclear man
431see @ref{Format Commands}.
432@end ifclear
252b5132
RH
433@end ifclear
434
435@kindex -c @var{MRI-cmdfile}
436@kindex --mri-script=@var{MRI-cmdfile}
437@cindex compatibility, MRI
438@item -c @var{MRI-commandfile}
439@itemx --mri-script=@var{MRI-commandfile}
ff5dcc92 440For compatibility with linkers produced by MRI, @command{ld} accepts script
252b5132 441files written in an alternate, restricted command language, described in
0285c67d
NC
442@ifclear man
443@ref{MRI,,MRI Compatible Script Files}.
444@end ifclear
445@ifset man
446the MRI Compatible Script Files section of GNU ld documentation.
447@end ifset
448Introduce MRI script files with
252b5132 449the option @samp{-c}; use the @samp{-T} option to run linker
ff5dcc92
SC
450scripts written in the general-purpose @command{ld} scripting language.
451If @var{MRI-cmdfile} does not exist, @command{ld} looks for it in the directories
252b5132
RH
452specified by any @samp{-L} options.
453
454@cindex common allocation
455@kindex -d
456@kindex -dc
457@kindex -dp
a1ab1d2a 458@item -d
252b5132
RH
459@itemx -dc
460@itemx -dp
461These three options are equivalent; multiple forms are supported for
462compatibility with other linkers. They assign space to common symbols
463even if a relocatable output file is specified (with @samp{-r}). The
464script command @code{FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
465@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
466
7ee314fa
AM
467@kindex --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
468@kindex -P @var{AUDITLIB}
469@item --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
470@itemx -P @var{AUDITLIB}
471Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
472@var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
473specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_DEPAUDIT}
474will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. This
475option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit interface.
9d5777a3 476The -P option is provided for Solaris compatibility.
7ee314fa 477
252b5132
RH
478@cindex entry point, from command line
479@kindex -e @var{entry}
480@kindex --entry=@var{entry}
a1ab1d2a 481@item -e @var{entry}
252b5132
RH
482@itemx --entry=@var{entry}
483Use @var{entry} as the explicit symbol for beginning execution of your
484program, rather than the default entry point. If there is no symbol
485named @var{entry}, the linker will try to parse @var{entry} as a number,
486and use that as the entry address (the number will be interpreted in
487base 10; you may use a leading @samp{0x} for base 16, or a leading
488@samp{0} for base 8). @xref{Entry Point}, for a discussion of defaults
489and other ways of specifying the entry point.
490
b58f81ae
DJ
491@kindex --exclude-libs
492@item --exclude-libs @var{lib},@var{lib},...
493Specifies a list of archive libraries from which symbols should not be automatically
e1c37eb5 494exported. The library names may be delimited by commas or colons. Specifying
b58f81ae
DJ
495@code{--exclude-libs ALL} excludes symbols in all archive libraries from
496automatic export. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted
497port of the linker and for ELF targeted ports. For i386 PE, symbols
498explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported, regardless of this
499option. For ELF targeted ports, symbols affected by this option will
500be treated as hidden.
501
e1c37eb5
DK
502@kindex --exclude-modules-for-implib
503@item --exclude-modules-for-implib @var{module},@var{module},...
504Specifies a list of object files or archive members, from which symbols
505should not be automatically exported, but which should be copied wholesale
506into the import library being generated during the link. The module names
507may be delimited by commas or colons, and must match exactly the filenames
508used by @command{ld} to open the files; for archive members, this is simply
509the member name, but for object files the name listed must include and
510match precisely any path used to specify the input file on the linker's
511command-line. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted port
512of the linker. Symbols explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported,
513regardless of this option.
514
252b5132
RH
515@cindex dynamic symbol table
516@kindex -E
517@kindex --export-dynamic
267e2722 518@kindex --no-export-dynamic
252b5132
RH
519@item -E
520@itemx --export-dynamic
267e2722
CD
521@itemx --no-export-dynamic
522When creating a dynamically linked executable, using the @option{-E}
523option or the @option{--export-dynamic} option causes the linker to add
524all symbols to the dynamic symbol table. The dynamic symbol table is the
525set of symbols which are visible from dynamic objects at run time.
526
527If you do not use either of these options (or use the
528@option{--no-export-dynamic} option to restore the default behavior), the
529dynamic symbol table will normally contain only those symbols which are
530referenced by some dynamic object mentioned in the link.
252b5132
RH
531
532If you use @code{dlopen} to load a dynamic object which needs to refer
533back to the symbols defined by the program, rather than some other
534dynamic object, then you will probably need to use this option when
535linking the program itself.
536
55255dae 537You can also use the dynamic list to control what symbols should
cb840a31 538be added to the dynamic symbol table if the output format supports it.
55255dae 539See the description of @samp{--dynamic-list}.
cb840a31 540
8b747e1a
DK
541Note that this option is specific to ELF targeted ports. PE targets
542support a similar function to export all symbols from a DLL or EXE; see
543the description of @samp{--export-all-symbols} below.
544
36f63dca 545@ifclear SingleFormat
252b5132
RH
546@cindex big-endian objects
547@cindex endianness
548@kindex -EB
549@item -EB
550Link big-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
551
552@cindex little-endian objects
553@kindex -EL
554@item -EL
555Link little-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
36f63dca 556@end ifclear
252b5132 557
2509a395
SL
558@kindex -f @var{name}
559@kindex --auxiliary=@var{name}
560@item -f @var{name}
561@itemx --auxiliary=@var{name}
252b5132
RH
562When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_AUXILIARY field
563to the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol
564table of the shared object should be used as an auxiliary filter on the
565symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
566
567If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
568run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_AUXILIARY field. If
569the dynamic linker resolves any symbols from the filter object, it will
570first check whether there is a definition in the shared object
571@var{name}. If there is one, it will be used instead of the definition
572in the filter object. The shared object @var{name} need not exist.
573Thus the shared object @var{name} may be used to provide an alternative
574implementation of certain functions, perhaps for debugging or for
575machine specific performance.
576
577This option may be specified more than once. The DT_AUXILIARY entries
578will be created in the order in which they appear on the command line.
579
2509a395
SL
580@kindex -F @var{name}
581@kindex --filter=@var{name}
252b5132 582@item -F @var{name}
2509a395 583@itemx --filter=@var{name}
252b5132
RH
584When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_FILTER field to
585the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol table
586of the shared object which is being created should be used as a filter
587on the symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
588
589If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
590run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_FILTER field. The
591dynamic linker will resolve symbols according to the symbol table of the
592filter object as usual, but it will actually link to the definitions
593found in the shared object @var{name}. Thus the filter object can be
594used to select a subset of the symbols provided by the object
595@var{name}.
596
ff5dcc92 597Some older linkers used the @option{-F} option throughout a compilation
252b5132 598toolchain for specifying object-file format for both input and output
36f63dca
NC
599object files.
600@ifclear SingleFormat
601The @sc{gnu} linker uses other mechanisms for this purpose: the
ece2d90e 602@option{-b}, @option{--format}, @option{--oformat} options, the
252b5132 603@code{TARGET} command in linker scripts, and the @code{GNUTARGET}
36f63dca
NC
604environment variable.
605@end ifclear
606The @sc{gnu} linker will ignore the @option{-F} option when not
607creating an ELF shared object.
252b5132 608
3dbf70a2 609@cindex finalization function
2509a395
SL
610@kindex -fini=@var{name}
611@item -fini=@var{name}
3dbf70a2
MM
612When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
613executable or shared object is unloaded, by setting DT_FINI to the
614address of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_fini} as
615the function to call.
616
252b5132
RH
617@kindex -g
618@item -g
619Ignored. Provided for compatibility with other tools.
620
2509a395
SL
621@kindex -G @var{value}
622@kindex --gpsize=@var{value}
252b5132 623@cindex object size
2509a395 624@item -G @var{value}
252b5132
RH
625@itemx --gpsize=@var{value}
626Set the maximum size of objects to be optimized using the GP register to
627@var{size}. This is only meaningful for object file formats such as
e8044f35 628MIPS ELF that support putting large and small objects into different
252b5132
RH
629sections. This is ignored for other object file formats.
630
631@cindex runtime library name
2509a395 632@kindex -h @var{name}
252b5132 633@kindex -soname=@var{name}
2509a395 634@item -h @var{name}
252b5132
RH
635@itemx -soname=@var{name}
636When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_SONAME field to
637the specified name. When an executable is linked with a shared object
638which has a DT_SONAME field, then when the executable is run the dynamic
639linker will attempt to load the shared object specified by the DT_SONAME
640field rather than the using the file name given to the linker.
641
642@kindex -i
643@cindex incremental link
644@item -i
645Perform an incremental link (same as option @samp{-r}).
646
3dbf70a2 647@cindex initialization function
2509a395
SL
648@kindex -init=@var{name}
649@item -init=@var{name}
3dbf70a2
MM
650When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
651executable or shared object is loaded, by setting DT_INIT to the address
652of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_init} as the
653function to call.
654
252b5132 655@cindex archive files, from cmd line
2509a395 656@kindex -l @var{namespec}
bcb674cf 657@kindex --library=@var{namespec}
2509a395 658@item -l @var{namespec}
bcb674cf
RS
659@itemx --library=@var{namespec}
660Add the archive or object file specified by @var{namespec} to the
661list of files to link. This option may be used any number of times.
662If @var{namespec} is of the form @file{:@var{filename}}, @command{ld}
07d8eb55 663will search the library path for a file called @var{filename}, otherwise it
bcb674cf 664will search the library path for a file called @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}.
252b5132 665
ff5dcc92 666On systems which support shared libraries, @command{ld} may also search for
bcb674cf
RS
667files other than @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. Specifically, on ELF
668and SunOS systems, @command{ld} will search a directory for a library
669called @file{lib@var{namespec}.so} before searching for one called
670@file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. (By convention, a @code{.so} extension
671indicates a shared library.) Note that this behavior does not apply
672to @file{:@var{filename}}, which always specifies a file called
673@var{filename}.
252b5132
RH
674
675The linker will search an archive only once, at the location where it is
676specified on the command line. If the archive defines a symbol which
677was undefined in some object which appeared before the archive on the
678command line, the linker will include the appropriate file(s) from the
679archive. However, an undefined symbol in an object appearing later on
680the command line will not cause the linker to search the archive again.
681
ff5dcc92 682See the @option{-(} option for a way to force the linker to search
252b5132
RH
683archives multiple times.
684
685You may list the same archive multiple times on the command line.
686
687@ifset GENERIC
688This type of archive searching is standard for Unix linkers. However,
ff5dcc92 689if you are using @command{ld} on AIX, note that it is different from the
252b5132
RH
690behaviour of the AIX linker.
691@end ifset
692
693@cindex search directory, from cmd line
2509a395 694@kindex -L @var{dir}
252b5132 695@kindex --library-path=@var{dir}
2509a395 696@item -L @var{searchdir}
252b5132 697@itemx --library-path=@var{searchdir}
ff5dcc92
SC
698Add path @var{searchdir} to the list of paths that @command{ld} will search
699for archive libraries and @command{ld} control scripts. You may use this
252b5132
RH
700option any number of times. The directories are searched in the order
701in which they are specified on the command line. Directories specified
702on the command line are searched before the default directories. All
ff5dcc92 703@option{-L} options apply to all @option{-l} options, regardless of the
7d24f02c
KH
704order in which the options appear. @option{-L} options do not affect
705how @command{ld} searches for a linker script unless @option{-T}
706option is specified.
252b5132 707
9c8ebd6a 708If @var{searchdir} begins with @code{=}, then the @code{=} will be replaced
b3b9c41d
HPN
709by the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, controlled by the @samp{--sysroot} option, or
710specified when the linker is configured.
9c8ebd6a 711
252b5132
RH
712@ifset UsesEnvVars
713The default set of paths searched (without being specified with
ff5dcc92 714@samp{-L}) depends on which emulation mode @command{ld} is using, and in
252b5132
RH
715some cases also on how it was configured. @xref{Environment}.
716@end ifset
717
718The paths can also be specified in a link script with the
719@code{SEARCH_DIR} command. Directories specified this way are searched
720at the point in which the linker script appears in the command line.
721
722@cindex emulation
723@kindex -m @var{emulation}
2509a395 724@item -m @var{emulation}
252b5132
RH
725Emulate the @var{emulation} linker. You can list the available
726emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options.
727
728If the @samp{-m} option is not used, the emulation is taken from the
729@code{LDEMULATION} environment variable, if that is defined.
730
731Otherwise, the default emulation depends upon how the linker was
732configured.
733
734@cindex link map
735@kindex -M
736@kindex --print-map
737@item -M
738@itemx --print-map
739Print a link map to the standard output. A link map provides
740information about the link, including the following:
741
742@itemize @bullet
743@item
3b83e13a 744Where object files are mapped into memory.
252b5132
RH
745@item
746How common symbols are allocated.
747@item
748All archive members included in the link, with a mention of the symbol
749which caused the archive member to be brought in.
3b83e13a
NC
750@item
751The values assigned to symbols.
752
753Note - symbols whose values are computed by an expression which
754involves a reference to a previous value of the same symbol may not
755have correct result displayed in the link map. This is because the
756linker discards intermediate results and only retains the final value
757of an expression. Under such circumstances the linker will display
758the final value enclosed by square brackets. Thus for example a
759linker script containing:
760
761@smallexample
762 foo = 1
763 foo = foo * 4
764 foo = foo + 8
765@end smallexample
766
767will produce the following output in the link map if the @option{-M}
768option is used:
769
770@smallexample
771 0x00000001 foo = 0x1
772 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo * 0x4)
773 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo + 0x8)
774@end smallexample
775
776See @ref{Expressions} for more information about expressions in linker
777scripts.
252b5132
RH
778@end itemize
779
780@kindex -n
781@cindex read-only text
782@cindex NMAGIC
783@kindex --nmagic
784@item -n
785@itemx --nmagic
90f5d9d9
JZ
786Turn off page alignment of sections, and disable linking against shared
787libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
788mark the output as @code{NMAGIC}.
252b5132
RH
789
790@kindex -N
791@kindex --omagic
792@cindex read/write from cmd line
793@cindex OMAGIC
a1ab1d2a 794@item -N
252b5132
RH
795@itemx --omagic
796Set the text and data sections to be readable and writable. Also, do
63fd3b82
NC
797not page-align the data segment, and disable linking against shared
798libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
4d8907ac
DS
799mark the output as @code{OMAGIC}. Note: Although a writable text section
800is allowed for PE-COFF targets, it does not conform to the format
801specification published by Microsoft.
63fd3b82
NC
802
803@kindex --no-omagic
804@cindex OMAGIC
805@item --no-omagic
806This option negates most of the effects of the @option{-N} option. It
807sets the text section to be read-only, and forces the data segment to
808be page-aligned. Note - this option does not enable linking against
809shared libraries. Use @option{-Bdynamic} for this.
252b5132
RH
810
811@kindex -o @var{output}
812@kindex --output=@var{output}
813@cindex naming the output file
814@item -o @var{output}
815@itemx --output=@var{output}
ff5dcc92 816Use @var{output} as the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; if this
252b5132
RH
817option is not specified, the name @file{a.out} is used by default. The
818script command @code{OUTPUT} can also specify the output file name.
819
820@kindex -O @var{level}
821@cindex generating optimized output
822@item -O @var{level}
ff5dcc92 823If @var{level} is a numeric values greater than zero @command{ld} optimizes
252b5132 824the output. This might take significantly longer and therefore probably
98c503ac
NC
825should only be enabled for the final binary. At the moment this
826option only affects ELF shared library generation. Future releases of
827the linker may make more use of this option. Also currently there is
828no difference in the linker's behaviour for different non-zero values
829of this option. Again this may change with future releases.
252b5132 830
26278bb8
UD
831@kindex --push-state
832@cindex push state governing input file handling
833@item --push-state
834The @option{--push-state} allows to preserve the current state of the
835flags which govern the input file handling so that they can all be
836restored with one corresponding @option{--pop-state} option.
837
838The option which are covered are: @option{-Bdynamic}, @option{-Bstatic},
839@option{-dn}, @option{-dy}, @option{-call_shared}, @option{-non_shared},
840@option{-static}, @option{-N}, @option{-n}, @option{--whole-archive},
841@option{--no-whole-archive}, @option{-r}, @option{-Ur},
842@option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}, @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries},
843@option{--as-needed}, @option{--no-as-needed}, and @option{-a}.
844
845One target for this option are specifications for @file{pkg-config}. When
846used with the @option{--libs} option all possibly needed libraries are
847listed and then possibly linked with all the time. It is better to return
848something as follows:
849
850@smallexample
851-Wl,--push-state,--as-needed -libone -libtwo -Wl,--pop-state
852@end smallexample
853
854@kindex --pop-state
855@cindex pop state governing input file handling
856Undoes the effect of --push-state, restores the previous values of the
857flags governing input file handling.
858
a712da20
NC
859@kindex -q
860@kindex --emit-relocs
861@cindex retain relocations in final executable
862@item -q
863@itemx --emit-relocs
ba1be17e 864Leave relocation sections and contents in fully linked executables.
a712da20
NC
865Post link analysis and optimization tools may need this information in
866order to perform correct modifications of executables. This results
867in larger executables.
868
dbab7a7b
NC
869This option is currently only supported on ELF platforms.
870
4f471f39
RS
871@kindex --force-dynamic
872@cindex forcing the creation of dynamic sections
873@item --force-dynamic
874Force the output file to have dynamic sections. This option is specific
875to VxWorks targets.
876
252b5132
RH
877@cindex partial link
878@cindex relocatable output
879@kindex -r
1049f94e 880@kindex --relocatable
252b5132 881@item -r
1049f94e 882@itemx --relocatable
252b5132 883Generate relocatable output---i.e., generate an output file that can in
ff5dcc92 884turn serve as input to @command{ld}. This is often called @dfn{partial
252b5132
RH
885linking}. As a side effect, in environments that support standard Unix
886magic numbers, this option also sets the output file's magic number to
887@code{OMAGIC}.
ff5dcc92 888@c ; see @option{-N}.
252b5132
RH
889If this option is not specified, an absolute file is produced. When
890linking C++ programs, this option @emph{will not} resolve references to
891constructors; to do that, use @samp{-Ur}.
892
62bf86b4
HPN
893When an input file does not have the same format as the output file,
894partial linking is only supported if that input file does not contain any
895relocations. Different output formats can have further restrictions; for
896example some @code{a.out}-based formats do not support partial linking
897with input files in other formats at all.
898
252b5132
RH
899This option does the same thing as @samp{-i}.
900
901@kindex -R @var{file}
902@kindex --just-symbols=@var{file}
903@cindex symbol-only input
904@item -R @var{filename}
905@itemx --just-symbols=@var{filename}
906Read symbol names and their addresses from @var{filename}, but do not
907relocate it or include it in the output. This allows your output file
908to refer symbolically to absolute locations of memory defined in other
909programs. You may use this option more than once.
910
ff5dcc92 911For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
252b5132 912followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
ff5dcc92 913the @option{-rpath} option.
252b5132
RH
914
915@kindex -s
916@kindex --strip-all
917@cindex strip all symbols
a1ab1d2a 918@item -s
252b5132
RH
919@itemx --strip-all
920Omit all symbol information from the output file.
921
922@kindex -S
923@kindex --strip-debug
924@cindex strip debugger symbols
a1ab1d2a 925@item -S
252b5132
RH
926@itemx --strip-debug
927Omit debugger symbol information (but not all symbols) from the output file.
928
929@kindex -t
930@kindex --trace
931@cindex input files, displaying
a1ab1d2a 932@item -t
252b5132 933@itemx --trace
ff5dcc92 934Print the names of the input files as @command{ld} processes them.
252b5132
RH
935
936@kindex -T @var{script}
937@kindex --script=@var{script}
938@cindex script files
939@item -T @var{scriptfile}
940@itemx --script=@var{scriptfile}
941Use @var{scriptfile} as the linker script. This script replaces
ff5dcc92 942@command{ld}'s default linker script (rather than adding to it), so
252b5132 943@var{commandfile} must specify everything necessary to describe the
114283d8
NC
944output file. @xref{Scripts}. If @var{scriptfile} does not exist in
945the current directory, @code{ld} looks for it in the directories
946specified by any preceding @samp{-L} options. Multiple @samp{-T}
947options accumulate.
252b5132 948
14be8564
L
949@kindex -dT @var{script}
950@kindex --default-script=@var{script}
951@cindex script files
952@item -dT @var{scriptfile}
953@itemx --default-script=@var{scriptfile}
954Use @var{scriptfile} as the default linker script. @xref{Scripts}.
955
956This option is similar to the @option{--script} option except that
957processing of the script is delayed until after the rest of the
958command line has been processed. This allows options placed after the
959@option{--default-script} option on the command line to affect the
960behaviour of the linker script, which can be important when the linker
961command line cannot be directly controlled by the user. (eg because
962the command line is being constructed by another tool, such as
963@samp{gcc}).
964
252b5132
RH
965@kindex -u @var{symbol}
966@kindex --undefined=@var{symbol}
967@cindex undefined symbol
968@item -u @var{symbol}
969@itemx --undefined=@var{symbol}
970Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
971symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
972modules from standard libraries. @samp{-u} may be repeated with
973different option arguments to enter additional undefined symbols. This
974option is equivalent to the @code{EXTERN} linker script command.
975
0a618243
AB
976If this option is being used to force additional modules to be pulled
977into the link, and if it is an error for the symbol to remain
978undefined, then the option @option{--require-defined} should be used
979instead.
980
981@kindex --require-defined=@var{symbol}
982@cindex symbols, require defined
983@cindex defined symbol
984@item --require-defined=@var{symbol}
985Require that @var{symbol} is defined in the output file. This option
986is the same as option @option{--undefined} except that if @var{symbol}
987is not defined in the output file then the linker will issue an error
988and exit. The same effect can be achieved in a linker script by using
989@code{EXTERN}, @code{ASSERT} and @code{DEFINED} together. This option
990can be used multiple times to require additional symbols.
991
252b5132
RH
992@kindex -Ur
993@cindex constructors
a1ab1d2a 994@item -Ur
252b5132
RH
995For anything other than C++ programs, this option is equivalent to
996@samp{-r}: it generates relocatable output---i.e., an output file that can in
ff5dcc92 997turn serve as input to @command{ld}. When linking C++ programs, @samp{-Ur}
252b5132
RH
998@emph{does} resolve references to constructors, unlike @samp{-r}.
999It does not work to use @samp{-Ur} on files that were themselves linked
1000with @samp{-Ur}; once the constructor table has been built, it cannot
1001be added to. Use @samp{-Ur} only for the last partial link, and
1002@samp{-r} for the others.
1003
c005eb9e
AB
1004@kindex --orphan-handling=@var{MODE}
1005@cindex orphan sections
1006@cindex sections, orphan
1007@item --orphan-handling=@var{MODE}
1008Control how orphan sections are handled. An orphan section is one not
1009specifically mentioned in a linker script. @xref{Orphan Sections}.
1010
1011@var{MODE} can have any of the following values:
1012
1013@table @code
1014@item place
1015Orphan sections are placed into a suitable output section following
1016the strategy described in @ref{Orphan Sections}. The option
1017@samp{--unique} also effects how sections are placed.
1018
1019@item discard
1020All orphan sections are discarded, by placing them in the
1021@samp{/DISCARD/} section (@pxref{Output Section Discarding}).
1022
1023@item warn
1024The linker will place the orphan section as for @code{place} and also
1025issue a warning.
1026
1027@item error
1028The linker will exit with an error if any orphan section is found.
1029@end table
1030
1031The default if @samp{--orphan-handling} is not given is @code{place}.
1032
577a0623
AM
1033@kindex --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
1034@item --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
1035Creates a separate output section for every input section matching
1036@var{SECTION}, or if the optional wildcard @var{SECTION} argument is
1037missing, for every orphan input section. An orphan section is one not
1038specifically mentioned in a linker script. You may use this option
1039multiple times on the command line; It prevents the normal merging of
1040input sections with the same name, overriding output section assignments
1041in a linker script.
a854a4a7 1042
252b5132
RH
1043@kindex -v
1044@kindex -V
1045@kindex --version
1046@cindex version
1047@item -v
1048@itemx --version
1049@itemx -V
ff5dcc92 1050Display the version number for @command{ld}. The @option{-V} option also
252b5132
RH
1051lists the supported emulations.
1052
1053@kindex -x
1054@kindex --discard-all
1055@cindex deleting local symbols
1056@item -x
1057@itemx --discard-all
1058Delete all local symbols.
1059
1060@kindex -X
1061@kindex --discard-locals
1062@cindex local symbols, deleting
a1ab1d2a 1063@item -X
252b5132 1064@itemx --discard-locals
3c68c38f
BW
1065Delete all temporary local symbols. (These symbols start with
1066system-specific local label prefixes, typically @samp{.L} for ELF systems
1067or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems.)
252b5132
RH
1068
1069@kindex -y @var{symbol}
1070@kindex --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
1071@cindex symbol tracing
1072@item -y @var{symbol}
1073@itemx --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
1074Print the name of each linked file in which @var{symbol} appears. This
1075option may be given any number of times. On many systems it is necessary
1076to prepend an underscore.
1077
1078This option is useful when you have an undefined symbol in your link but
1079don't know where the reference is coming from.
1080
1081@kindex -Y @var{path}
1082@item -Y @var{path}
1083Add @var{path} to the default library search path. This option exists
1084for Solaris compatibility.
1085
1086@kindex -z @var{keyword}
1087@item -z @var{keyword}
cd6d6c15
NC
1088The recognized keywords are:
1089@table @samp
1090
1091@item combreloc
1092Combines multiple reloc sections and sorts them to make dynamic symbol
1093lookup caching possible.
1094
1095@item defs
560e09e9 1096Disallows undefined symbols in object files. Undefined symbols in
07f3b6ad 1097shared libraries are still allowed.
cd6d6c15 1098
6aa29e7b
JJ
1099@item execstack
1100Marks the object as requiring executable stack.
1101
b039ef04
L
1102@item global
1103This option is only meaningful when building a shared object. It makes
1104the symbols defined by this shared object available for symbol resolution
1105of subsequently loaded libraries.
1106
cd6d6c15
NC
1107@item initfirst
1108This option is only meaningful when building a shared object.
1109It marks the object so that its runtime initialization will occur
1110before the runtime initialization of any other objects brought into
1111the process at the same time. Similarly the runtime finalization of
1112the object will occur after the runtime finalization of any other
1113objects.
1114
1115@item interpose
1116Marks the object that its symbol table interposes before all symbols
1117but the primary executable.
1118
5fa222e4
AM
1119@item lazy
1120When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1121dynamic linker to defer function call resolution to the point when
1122the function is called (lazy binding), rather than at load time.
1123Lazy binding is the default.
1124
cd6d6c15
NC
1125@item loadfltr
1126Marks the object that its filters be processed immediately at
1127runtime.
1128
1129@item muldefs
1130Allows multiple definitions.
1131
1132@item nocombreloc
1133Disables multiple reloc sections combining.
1134
1135@item nocopyreloc
daf220f0
AM
1136Disable linker generated .dynbss variables used in place of variables
1137defined in shared libraries. May result in dynamic text relocations.
cd6d6c15
NC
1138
1139@item nodefaultlib
1140Marks the object that the search for dependencies of this object will
1141ignore any default library search paths.
1142
1143@item nodelete
1144Marks the object shouldn't be unloaded at runtime.
1145
1146@item nodlopen
1147Marks the object not available to @code{dlopen}.
1148
1149@item nodump
1150Marks the object can not be dumped by @code{dldump}.
1151
6aa29e7b
JJ
1152@item noexecstack
1153Marks the object as not requiring executable stack.
1154
8dfef1bd
L
1155@item text
1156Treat DT_TEXTREL in shared object as error.
1157
1158@item notext
1159Don't treat DT_TEXTREL in shared object as error.
1160
1161@item textoff
1162Don't treat DT_TEXTREL in shared object as error.
1163
6aa29e7b
JJ
1164@item norelro
1165Don't create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1166
cd6d6c15
NC
1167@item now
1168When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1169dynamic linker to resolve all symbols when the program is started, or
1170when the shared library is linked to using dlopen, instead of
1171deferring function call resolution to the point when the function is
1172first called.
1173
1174@item origin
1175Marks the object may contain $ORIGIN.
1176
6aa29e7b
JJ
1177@item relro
1178Create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1179
24718e3b
L
1180@item max-page-size=@var{value}
1181Set the emulation maximum page size to @var{value}.
1182
1183@item common-page-size=@var{value}
1184Set the emulation common page size to @var{value}.
1185
04c3a755
NS
1186@item stack-size=@var{value}
1187Specify a stack size for in an ELF @code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment.
1188Specifying zero will override any default non-zero sized
1189@code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment creation.
1190
d258b828
IZ
1191@item bndplt
1192Always generate BND prefix in PLT entries. Supported for Linux/x86_64.
1193
889c2a67
L
1194@item noextern-protected-data
1195Don't treat protected data symbol as external when building shared
1196library. This option overrides linker backend default. It can be used
1197to workaround incorrect relocations against protected data symbols
1198generated by compiler. Updates on protected data symbols by another
4dba69b9 1199module aren't visible to the resulting shared library. Supported for
889c2a67
L
1200i386 and x86-64.
1201
caa65211
L
1202@item call-nop=prefix-addr
1203@itemx call-nop=prefix-nop
1204@itemx call-nop=suffix-nop
1205@itemx call-nop=prefix-@var{byte}
1206@itemx call-nop=suffix-@var{byte}
1207Specify the 1-byte @code{NOP} padding when transforming indirect call
1208to a locally defined function, foo, via its GOT slot.
1209@option{call-nop=prefix-addr} generates @code{0x67 call foo}.
1210@option{call-nop=prefix-nop} generates @code{0x90 call foo}.
1211@option{call-nop=suffix-nop} generates @code{call foo 0x90}.
1212@option{call-nop=prefix-@var{byte}} generates @code{@var{byte} call foo}.
1213@option{call-nop=suffix-@var{byte}} generates @code{call foo @var{byte}}.
1214Supported for i386 and x86_64.
1215
cd6d6c15
NC
1216@end table
1217
ece2d90e 1218Other keywords are ignored for Solaris compatibility.
252b5132
RH
1219
1220@kindex -(
1221@cindex groups of archives
1222@item -( @var{archives} -)
1223@itemx --start-group @var{archives} --end-group
1224The @var{archives} should be a list of archive files. They may be
1225either explicit file names, or @samp{-l} options.
1226
1227The specified archives are searched repeatedly until no new undefined
1228references are created. Normally, an archive is searched only once in
1229the order that it is specified on the command line. If a symbol in that
1230archive is needed to resolve an undefined symbol referred to by an
1231object in an archive that appears later on the command line, the linker
1232would not be able to resolve that reference. By grouping the archives,
1233they all be searched repeatedly until all possible references are
1234resolved.
1235
1236Using this option has a significant performance cost. It is best to use
1237it only when there are unavoidable circular references between two or
1238more archives.
1239
69da35b5
NC
1240@kindex --accept-unknown-input-arch
1241@kindex --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1242@item --accept-unknown-input-arch
1243@itemx --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1244Tells the linker to accept input files whose architecture cannot be
2ca22b03 1245recognised. The assumption is that the user knows what they are doing
69da35b5
NC
1246and deliberately wants to link in these unknown input files. This was
1247the default behaviour of the linker, before release 2.14. The default
1248behaviour from release 2.14 onwards is to reject such input files, and
1249so the @samp{--accept-unknown-input-arch} option has been added to
1250restore the old behaviour.
2ca22b03 1251
4a43e768
AM
1252@kindex --as-needed
1253@kindex --no-as-needed
1254@item --as-needed
1255@itemx --no-as-needed
1256This option affects ELF DT_NEEDED tags for dynamic libraries mentioned
ddbb8a31 1257on the command line after the @option{--as-needed} option. Normally
4a43e768
AM
1258the linker will add a DT_NEEDED tag for each dynamic library mentioned
1259on the command line, regardless of whether the library is actually
ddbb8a31 1260needed or not. @option{--as-needed} causes a DT_NEEDED tag to only be
ffa9430d
AM
1261emitted for a library that @emph{at that point in the link} satisfies a
1262non-weak undefined symbol reference from a regular object file or, if
1240be6b
AM
1263the library is not found in the DT_NEEDED lists of other needed libraries, a
1264non-weak undefined symbol reference from another needed dynamic library.
ffa9430d
AM
1265Object files or libraries appearing on the command line @emph{after}
1266the library in question do not affect whether the library is seen as
1267needed. This is similar to the rules for extraction of object files
1268from archives. @option{--no-as-needed} restores the default behaviour.
4a43e768 1269
e56f61be
L
1270@kindex --add-needed
1271@kindex --no-add-needed
1272@item --add-needed
1273@itemx --no-add-needed
ddbb8a31
NC
1274These two options have been deprecated because of the similarity of
1275their names to the @option{--as-needed} and @option{--no-as-needed}
1276options. They have been replaced by @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
1277and @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
e56f61be 1278
252b5132
RH
1279@kindex -assert @var{keyword}
1280@item -assert @var{keyword}
1281This option is ignored for SunOS compatibility.
1282
1283@kindex -Bdynamic
1284@kindex -dy
1285@kindex -call_shared
1286@item -Bdynamic
1287@itemx -dy
1288@itemx -call_shared
1289Link against dynamic libraries. This is only meaningful on platforms
1290for which shared libraries are supported. This option is normally the
1291default on such platforms. The different variants of this option are
1292for compatibility with various systems. You may use this option
1293multiple times on the command line: it affects library searching for
da8bce14 1294@option{-l} options which follow it.
252b5132 1295
a1ab1d2a
UD
1296@kindex -Bgroup
1297@item -Bgroup
1298Set the @code{DF_1_GROUP} flag in the @code{DT_FLAGS_1} entry in the dynamic
1299section. This causes the runtime linker to handle lookups in this
1300object and its dependencies to be performed only inside the group.
560e09e9
NC
1301@option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all} is implied. This option is
1302only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
a1ab1d2a 1303
252b5132
RH
1304@kindex -Bstatic
1305@kindex -dn
1306@kindex -non_shared
1307@kindex -static
a1ab1d2a 1308@item -Bstatic
252b5132
RH
1309@itemx -dn
1310@itemx -non_shared
1311@itemx -static
1312Do not link against shared libraries. This is only meaningful on
1313platforms for which shared libraries are supported. The different
1314variants of this option are for compatibility with various systems. You
1315may use this option multiple times on the command line: it affects
560e09e9 1316library searching for @option{-l} options which follow it. This
e9156f74
NC
1317option also implies @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all}. This
1318option can be used with @option{-shared}. Doing so means that a
1319shared library is being created but that all of the library's external
1320references must be resolved by pulling in entries from static
ece2d90e 1321libraries.
252b5132
RH
1322
1323@kindex -Bsymbolic
1324@item -Bsymbolic
1325When creating a shared library, bind references to global symbols to the
1326definition within the shared library, if any. Normally, it is possible
1327for a program linked against a shared library to override the definition
1328within the shared library. This option is only meaningful on ELF
1329platforms which support shared libraries.
1330
40b36307
L
1331@kindex -Bsymbolic-functions
1332@item -Bsymbolic-functions
1333When creating a shared library, bind references to global function
c0065db7 1334symbols to the definition within the shared library, if any.
40b36307
L
1335This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared
1336libraries.
1337
55255dae
L
1338@kindex --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1339@item --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1340Specify the name of a dynamic list file to the linker. This is
1341typically used when creating shared libraries to specify a list of
1342global symbols whose references shouldn't be bound to the definition
1343within the shared library, or creating dynamically linked executables
1344to specify a list of symbols which should be added to the symbol table
1345in the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms
1346which support shared libraries.
1347
1348The format of the dynamic list is the same as the version node without
1349scope and node name. See @ref{VERSION} for more information.
1350
40b36307
L
1351@kindex --dynamic-list-data
1352@item --dynamic-list-data
1353Include all global data symbols to the dynamic list.
1354
1355@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1356@item --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1357Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ operator new and delete. It
1358is mainly useful for building shared libstdc++.
1359
0b8a70d9
L
1360@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1361@item --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1362Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ runtime type identification.
1363
252b5132
RH
1364@kindex --check-sections
1365@kindex --no-check-sections
1366@item --check-sections
308b1ffd 1367@itemx --no-check-sections
252b5132 1368Asks the linker @emph{not} to check section addresses after they have
7d816a17 1369been assigned to see if there are any overlaps. Normally the linker will
252b5132
RH
1370perform this check, and if it finds any overlaps it will produce
1371suitable error messages. The linker does know about, and does make
1372allowances for sections in overlays. The default behaviour can be
560e09e9 1373restored by using the command line switch @option{--check-sections}.
02b0b1aa
NS
1374Section overlap is not usually checked for relocatable links. You can
1375force checking in that case by using the @option{--check-sections}
1376option.
252b5132 1377
ddbb8a31
NC
1378@kindex --copy-dt-needed-entries
1379@kindex --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
1380@item --copy-dt-needed-entries
1381@itemx --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
9d5777a3 1382This option affects the treatment of dynamic libraries referred to
ddbb8a31 1383by DT_NEEDED tags @emph{inside} ELF dynamic libraries mentioned on the
08efffb8 1384command line. Normally the linker won't add a DT_NEEDED tag to the
ddbb8a31 1385output binary for each library mentioned in a DT_NEEDED tag in an
08efffb8 1386input dynamic library. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
ddbb8a31 1387specified on the command line however any dynamic libraries that
08efffb8
MM
1388follow it will have their DT_NEEDED entries added. The default
1389behaviour can be restored with @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
ddbb8a31
NC
1390
1391This option also has an effect on the resolution of symbols in dynamic
08efffb8
MM
1392libraries. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries} dynamic libraries
1393mentioned on the command line will be recursively searched, following
1394their DT_NEEDED tags to other libraries, in order to resolve symbols
1395required by the output binary. With the default setting however
1396the searching of dynamic libraries that follow it will stop with the
1397dynamic library itself. No DT_NEEDED links will be traversed to resolve
ddbb8a31
NC
1398symbols.
1399
252b5132
RH
1400@cindex cross reference table
1401@kindex --cref
1402@item --cref
1403Output a cross reference table. If a linker map file is being
1404generated, the cross reference table is printed to the map file.
1405Otherwise, it is printed on the standard output.
1406
1407The format of the table is intentionally simple, so that it may be
1408easily processed by a script if necessary. The symbols are printed out,
1409sorted by name. For each symbol, a list of file names is given. If the
1410symbol is defined, the first file listed is the location of the
049c1c8e
NC
1411definition. If the symbol is defined as a common value then any files
1412where this happens appear next. Finally any files that reference the
1413symbol are listed.
252b5132 1414
4818e05f
AM
1415@cindex common allocation
1416@kindex --no-define-common
1417@item --no-define-common
1418This option inhibits the assignment of addresses to common symbols.
1419The script command @code{INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
1420@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1421
1422The @samp{--no-define-common} option allows decoupling
1423the decision to assign addresses to Common symbols from the choice
1424of the output file type; otherwise a non-Relocatable output type
1425forces assigning addresses to Common symbols.
1426Using @samp{--no-define-common} allows Common symbols that are referenced
1427from a shared library to be assigned addresses only in the main program.
1428This eliminates the unused duplicate space in the shared library,
1429and also prevents any possible confusion over resolving to the wrong
1430duplicate when there are many dynamic modules with specialized search
1431paths for runtime symbol resolution.
1432
252b5132 1433@cindex symbols, from command line
2509a395
SL
1434@kindex --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{exp}
1435@item --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{expression}
252b5132
RH
1436Create a global symbol in the output file, containing the absolute
1437address given by @var{expression}. You may use this option as many
1438times as necessary to define multiple symbols in the command line. A
1439limited form of arithmetic is supported for the @var{expression} in this
1440context: you may give a hexadecimal constant or the name of an existing
1441symbol, or use @code{+} and @code{-} to add or subtract hexadecimal
1442constants or symbols. If you need more elaborate expressions, consider
66bc8739
AM
1443using the linker command language from a script (@pxref{Assignments}).
1444@emph{Note:} there should be no white space between @var{symbol}, the
1445equals sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{expression}.
252b5132
RH
1446
1447@cindex demangling, from command line
28c309a2 1448@kindex --demangle[=@var{style}]
252b5132 1449@kindex --no-demangle
28c309a2 1450@item --demangle[=@var{style}]
252b5132
RH
1451@itemx --no-demangle
1452These options control whether to demangle symbol names in error messages
1453and other output. When the linker is told to demangle, it tries to
1454present symbol names in a readable fashion: it strips leading
1455underscores if they are used by the object file format, and converts C++
a1ab1d2a
UD
1456mangled symbol names into user readable names. Different compilers have
1457different mangling styles. The optional demangling style argument can be used
1458to choose an appropriate demangling style for your compiler. The linker will
28c309a2
NC
1459demangle by default unless the environment variable @samp{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}
1460is set. These options may be used to override the default.
252b5132
RH
1461
1462@cindex dynamic linker, from command line
506eee22 1463@kindex -I@var{file}
2509a395
SL
1464@kindex --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
1465@item -I@var{file}
1466@itemx --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
252b5132
RH
1467Set the name of the dynamic linker. This is only meaningful when
1468generating dynamically linked ELF executables. The default dynamic
1469linker is normally correct; don't use this unless you know what you are
1470doing.
1471
9b8b325a
RF
1472@kindex --no-dynamic-linker
1473@item --no-dynamic-linker
1474When producing an executable file, omit the request for a dynamic
1475linker to be used at load-time. This is only meaningful for ELF
1476executables that contain dynamic relocations, and usually requires
1477entry point code that is capable of processing these relocations.
1478
7ce691ae 1479@kindex --fatal-warnings
0fe58ccd 1480@kindex --no-fatal-warnings
7ce691ae 1481@item --fatal-warnings
0fe58ccd
NC
1482@itemx --no-fatal-warnings
1483Treat all warnings as errors. The default behaviour can be restored
1484with the option @option{--no-fatal-warnings}.
7ce691ae 1485
252b5132
RH
1486@kindex --force-exe-suffix
1487@item --force-exe-suffix
1488Make sure that an output file has a .exe suffix.
1489
1490If a successfully built fully linked output file does not have a
1491@code{.exe} or @code{.dll} suffix, this option forces the linker to copy
1492the output file to one of the same name with a @code{.exe} suffix. This
1493option is useful when using unmodified Unix makefiles on a Microsoft
1494Windows host, since some versions of Windows won't run an image unless
1495it ends in a @code{.exe} suffix.
1496
1497@kindex --gc-sections
1498@kindex --no-gc-sections
1499@cindex garbage collection
c17d87de
NC
1500@item --gc-sections
1501@itemx --no-gc-sections
252b5132 1502Enable garbage collection of unused input sections. It is ignored on
ac69cbc6 1503targets that do not support this option. The default behaviour (of not
b3549761 1504performing this garbage collection) can be restored by specifying
0f088b2a
KT
1505@samp{--no-gc-sections} on the command line. Note that garbage
1506collection for COFF and PE format targets is supported, but the
1507implementation is currently considered to be experimental.
252b5132 1508
d5465ba2
AM
1509@samp{--gc-sections} decides which input sections are used by
1510examining symbols and relocations. The section containing the entry
1511symbol and all sections containing symbols undefined on the
1512command-line will be kept, as will sections containing symbols
1513referenced by dynamic objects. Note that when building shared
1514libraries, the linker must assume that any visible symbol is
1515referenced. Once this initial set of sections has been determined,
1516the linker recursively marks as used any section referenced by their
1517relocations. See @samp{--entry} and @samp{--undefined}.
1518
ac69cbc6 1519This option can be set when doing a partial link (enabled with option
9d5777a3 1520@samp{-r}). In this case the root of symbols kept must be explicitly
ac69cbc6
TG
1521specified either by an @samp{--entry} or @samp{--undefined} option or by
1522a @code{ENTRY} command in the linker script.
1523
c17d87de
NC
1524@kindex --print-gc-sections
1525@kindex --no-print-gc-sections
1526@cindex garbage collection
1527@item --print-gc-sections
1528@itemx --no-print-gc-sections
1529List all sections removed by garbage collection. The listing is
1530printed on stderr. This option is only effective if garbage
1531collection has been enabled via the @samp{--gc-sections}) option. The
1532default behaviour (of not listing the sections that are removed) can
1533be restored by specifying @samp{--no-print-gc-sections} on the command
1534line.
1535
30824704
RM
1536@kindex --print-output-format
1537@cindex output format
1538@item --print-output-format
1539Print the name of the default output format (perhaps influenced by
1540other command-line options). This is the string that would appear
1541in an @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} linker script command (@pxref{File Commands}).
1542
3604cb1f
TG
1543@kindex --print-memory-usage
1544@cindex memory usage
1545@item --print-memory-usage
1546Print used size, total size and used size of memory regions created with
1547the @ref{MEMORY} command. This is useful on embedded targets to have a
1548quick view of amount of free memory. The format of the output has one
1549headline and one line per region. It is both human readable and easily
1550parsable by tools. Here is an example of an output:
1551
1552@smallexample
1553Memory region Used Size Region Size %age Used
1554 ROM: 256 KB 1 MB 25.00%
1555 RAM: 32 B 2 GB 0.00%
1556@end smallexample
1557
252b5132
RH
1558@cindex help
1559@cindex usage
1560@kindex --help
1561@item --help
1562Print a summary of the command-line options on the standard output and exit.
1563
ea20a7da
CC
1564@kindex --target-help
1565@item --target-help
1566Print a summary of all target specific options on the standard output and exit.
1567
2509a395
SL
1568@kindex -Map=@var{mapfile}
1569@item -Map=@var{mapfile}
252b5132 1570Print a link map to the file @var{mapfile}. See the description of the
560e09e9 1571@option{-M} option, above.
252b5132
RH
1572
1573@cindex memory usage
1574@kindex --no-keep-memory
1575@item --no-keep-memory
ff5dcc92
SC
1576@command{ld} normally optimizes for speed over memory usage by caching the
1577symbol tables of input files in memory. This option tells @command{ld} to
252b5132 1578instead optimize for memory usage, by rereading the symbol tables as
ff5dcc92 1579necessary. This may be required if @command{ld} runs out of memory space
252b5132
RH
1580while linking a large executable.
1581
1582@kindex --no-undefined
a1ab1d2a 1583@kindex -z defs
252b5132 1584@item --no-undefined
a1ab1d2a 1585@itemx -z defs
560e09e9
NC
1586Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files. This
1587is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared library.
1588The switch @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} controls the
1589behaviour for reporting unresolved references found in shared
ece2d90e 1590libraries being linked in.
252b5132 1591
aa713662
L
1592@kindex --allow-multiple-definition
1593@kindex -z muldefs
1594@item --allow-multiple-definition
1595@itemx -z muldefs
1596Normally when a symbol is defined multiple times, the linker will
1597report a fatal error. These options allow multiple definitions and the
1598first definition will be used.
1599
b79e8c78 1600@kindex --allow-shlib-undefined
ae9a127f 1601@kindex --no-allow-shlib-undefined
b79e8c78 1602@item --allow-shlib-undefined
ae9a127f 1603@itemx --no-allow-shlib-undefined
903249d7 1604Allows or disallows undefined symbols in shared libraries.
560e09e9
NC
1605This switch is similar to @option{--no-undefined} except that it
1606determines the behaviour when the undefined symbols are in a
1607shared library rather than a regular object file. It does not affect
1608how undefined symbols in regular object files are handled.
1609
903249d7
NC
1610The default behaviour is to report errors for any undefined symbols
1611referenced in shared libraries if the linker is being used to create
1612an executable, but to allow them if the linker is being used to create
1613a shared library.
1614
1615The reasons for allowing undefined symbol references in shared
1616libraries specified at link time are that:
1617
1618@itemize @bullet
1619@item
1620A shared library specified at link time may not be the same as the one
1621that is available at load time, so the symbol might actually be
1622resolvable at load time.
1623@item
1624There are some operating systems, eg BeOS and HPPA, where undefined
1625symbols in shared libraries are normal.
1626
1627The BeOS kernel for example patches shared libraries at load time to
1628select whichever function is most appropriate for the current
1629architecture. This is used, for example, to dynamically select an
1630appropriate memset function.
1631@end itemize
b79e8c78 1632
31941635
L
1633@kindex --no-undefined-version
1634@item --no-undefined-version
1635Normally when a symbol has an undefined version, the linker will ignore
1636it. This option disallows symbols with undefined version and a fatal error
1637will be issued instead.
1638
3e3b46e5
PB
1639@kindex --default-symver
1640@item --default-symver
1641Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
fc0e6df6
PB
1642exported symbols.
1643
1644@kindex --default-imported-symver
1645@item --default-imported-symver
1646Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1647imported symbols.
3e3b46e5 1648
252b5132
RH
1649@kindex --no-warn-mismatch
1650@item --no-warn-mismatch
ff5dcc92 1651Normally @command{ld} will give an error if you try to link together input
252b5132
RH
1652files that are mismatched for some reason, perhaps because they have
1653been compiled for different processors or for different endiannesses.
ff5dcc92 1654This option tells @command{ld} that it should silently permit such possible
252b5132
RH
1655errors. This option should only be used with care, in cases when you
1656have taken some special action that ensures that the linker errors are
1657inappropriate.
1658
fe7929ce
AM
1659@kindex --no-warn-search-mismatch
1660@item --no-warn-search-mismatch
1661Normally @command{ld} will give a warning if it finds an incompatible
1662library during a library search. This option silences the warning.
1663
252b5132
RH
1664@kindex --no-whole-archive
1665@item --no-whole-archive
ff5dcc92 1666Turn off the effect of the @option{--whole-archive} option for subsequent
252b5132
RH
1667archive files.
1668
1669@cindex output file after errors
1670@kindex --noinhibit-exec
1671@item --noinhibit-exec
1672Retain the executable output file whenever it is still usable.
1673Normally, the linker will not produce an output file if it encounters
1674errors during the link process; it exits without writing an output file
1675when it issues any error whatsoever.
1676
0a9c1c8e
CD
1677@kindex -nostdlib
1678@item -nostdlib
1679Only search library directories explicitly specified on the
1680command line. Library directories specified in linker scripts
1681(including linker scripts specified on the command line) are ignored.
1682
252b5132 1683@ifclear SingleFormat
2509a395
SL
1684@kindex --oformat=@var{output-format}
1685@item --oformat=@var{output-format}
ff5dcc92
SC
1686@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
1687file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
252b5132 1688@samp{--oformat} option to specify the binary format for the output
ff5dcc92
SC
1689object file. Even when @command{ld} is configured to support alternative
1690object formats, you don't usually need to specify this, as @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
1691should be configured to produce as a default output format the most
1692usual format on each machine. @var{output-format} is a text string, the
1693name of a particular format supported by the BFD libraries. (You can
1694list the available binary formats with @samp{objdump -i}.) The script
1695command @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} can also specify the output format, but
1696this option overrides it. @xref{BFD}.
1697@end ifclear
1698
36af4a4e
JJ
1699@kindex -pie
1700@kindex --pic-executable
1701@item -pie
1702@itemx --pic-executable
1703@cindex position independent executables
1704Create a position independent executable. This is currently only supported on
1705ELF platforms. Position independent executables are similar to shared
1706libraries in that they are relocated by the dynamic linker to the virtual
7e7d5768 1707address the OS chooses for them (which can vary between invocations). Like
36af4a4e
JJ
1708normal dynamically linked executables they can be executed and symbols
1709defined in the executable cannot be overridden by shared libraries.
1710
252b5132
RH
1711@kindex -qmagic
1712@item -qmagic
1713This option is ignored for Linux compatibility.
1714
1715@kindex -Qy
1716@item -Qy
1717This option is ignored for SVR4 compatibility.
1718
1719@kindex --relax
1720@cindex synthesizing linker
1721@cindex relaxing addressing modes
28d5f677 1722@cindex --no-relax
252b5132 1723@item --relax
28d5f677 1724@itemx --no-relax
a1ab1d2a 1725An option with machine dependent effects.
252b5132
RH
1726@ifset GENERIC
1727This option is only supported on a few targets.
1728@end ifset
1729@ifset H8300
ff5dcc92 1730@xref{H8/300,,@command{ld} and the H8/300}.
252b5132
RH
1731@end ifset
1732@ifset I960
ff5dcc92 1733@xref{i960,, @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family}.
252b5132 1734@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
1735@ifset XTENSA
1736@xref{Xtensa,, @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors}.
1737@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
1738@ifset M68HC11
1739@xref{M68HC11/68HC12,,@command{ld} and the 68HC11 and 68HC12}.
1740@end ifset
78058a5e
SL
1741@ifset NIOSII
1742@xref{Nios II,,@command{ld} and the Altera Nios II}.
1743@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
1744@ifset POWERPC
1745@xref{PowerPC ELF32,,@command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support}.
1746@end ifset
252b5132 1747
28d5f677
NC
1748On some platforms the @samp{--relax} option performs target specific,
1749global optimizations that become possible when the linker resolves
1750addressing in the program, such as relaxing address modes,
1751synthesizing new instructions, selecting shorter version of current
11e7fd74 1752instructions, and combining constant values.
252b5132
RH
1753
1754On some platforms these link time global optimizations may make symbolic
1755debugging of the resulting executable impossible.
1756@ifset GENERIC
28d5f677
NC
1757This is known to be the case for the Matsushita MN10200 and MN10300
1758family of processors.
252b5132
RH
1759@end ifset
1760
1761@ifset GENERIC
1762On platforms where this is not supported, @samp{--relax} is accepted,
1763but ignored.
1764@end ifset
1765
28d5f677
NC
1766On platforms where @samp{--relax} is accepted the option
1767@samp{--no-relax} can be used to disable the feature.
1768
252b5132
RH
1769@cindex retaining specified symbols
1770@cindex stripping all but some symbols
1771@cindex symbols, retaining selectively
2509a395
SL
1772@kindex --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
1773@item --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
252b5132
RH
1774Retain @emph{only} the symbols listed in the file @var{filename},
1775discarding all others. @var{filename} is simply a flat file, with one
1776symbol name per line. This option is especially useful in environments
1777@ifset GENERIC
1778(such as VxWorks)
1779@end ifset
1780where a large global symbol table is accumulated gradually, to conserve
1781run-time memory.
1782
1783@samp{--retain-symbols-file} does @emph{not} discard undefined symbols,
1784or symbols needed for relocations.
1785
1786You may only specify @samp{--retain-symbols-file} once in the command
1787line. It overrides @samp{-s} and @samp{-S}.
1788
1789@ifset GENERIC
2509a395 1790@item -rpath=@var{dir}
252b5132 1791@cindex runtime library search path
2509a395 1792@kindex -rpath=@var{dir}
252b5132 1793Add a directory to the runtime library search path. This is used when
ff5dcc92 1794linking an ELF executable with shared objects. All @option{-rpath}
252b5132 1795arguments are concatenated and passed to the runtime linker, which uses
ff5dcc92 1796them to locate shared objects at runtime. The @option{-rpath} option is
252b5132
RH
1797also used when locating shared objects which are needed by shared
1798objects explicitly included in the link; see the description of the
ff5dcc92 1799@option{-rpath-link} option. If @option{-rpath} is not used when linking an
252b5132
RH
1800ELF executable, the contents of the environment variable
1801@code{LD_RUN_PATH} will be used if it is defined.
1802
ff5dcc92 1803The @option{-rpath} option may also be used on SunOS. By default, on
252b5132 1804SunOS, the linker will form a runtime search patch out of all the
ff5dcc92
SC
1805@option{-L} options it is given. If a @option{-rpath} option is used, the
1806runtime search path will be formed exclusively using the @option{-rpath}
1807options, ignoring the @option{-L} options. This can be useful when using
1808gcc, which adds many @option{-L} options which may be on NFS mounted
b45619c0 1809file systems.
252b5132 1810
ff5dcc92 1811For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
252b5132 1812followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
ff5dcc92 1813the @option{-rpath} option.
252b5132
RH
1814@end ifset
1815
1816@ifset GENERIC
1817@cindex link-time runtime library search path
2509a395
SL
1818@kindex -rpath-link=@var{dir}
1819@item -rpath-link=@var{dir}
252b5132
RH
1820When using ELF or SunOS, one shared library may require another. This
1821happens when an @code{ld -shared} link includes a shared library as one
1822of the input files.
1823
1824When the linker encounters such a dependency when doing a non-shared,
1825non-relocatable link, it will automatically try to locate the required
1826shared library and include it in the link, if it is not included
ff5dcc92 1827explicitly. In such a case, the @option{-rpath-link} option
252b5132 1828specifies the first set of directories to search. The
ff5dcc92 1829@option{-rpath-link} option may specify a sequence of directory names
252b5132
RH
1830either by specifying a list of names separated by colons, or by
1831appearing multiple times.
1832
28c309a2
NC
1833This option should be used with caution as it overrides the search path
1834that may have been hard compiled into a shared library. In such a case it
1835is possible to use unintentionally a different search path than the
1836runtime linker would do.
1837
252b5132 1838The linker uses the following search paths to locate required shared
ece2d90e 1839libraries:
252b5132
RH
1840@enumerate
1841@item
ff5dcc92 1842Any directories specified by @option{-rpath-link} options.
252b5132 1843@item
ff5dcc92
SC
1844Any directories specified by @option{-rpath} options. The difference
1845between @option{-rpath} and @option{-rpath-link} is that directories
1846specified by @option{-rpath} options are included in the executable and
1847used at runtime, whereas the @option{-rpath-link} option is only effective
ece2d90e
NC
1848at link time. Searching @option{-rpath} in this way is only supported
1849by native linkers and cross linkers which have been configured with
1850the @option{--with-sysroot} option.
252b5132 1851@item
e2a83dd0
NC
1852On an ELF system, for native linkers, if the @option{-rpath} and
1853@option{-rpath-link} options were not used, search the contents of the
1854environment variable @code{LD_RUN_PATH}.
252b5132 1855@item
ff5dcc92
SC
1856On SunOS, if the @option{-rpath} option was not used, search any
1857directories specified using @option{-L} options.
252b5132 1858@item
a1b8d843 1859For a native linker, search the contents of the environment
e2a83dd0 1860variable @code{LD_LIBRARY_PATH}.
252b5132 1861@item
ec4eb78a
L
1862For a native ELF linker, the directories in @code{DT_RUNPATH} or
1863@code{DT_RPATH} of a shared library are searched for shared
1864libraries needed by it. The @code{DT_RPATH} entries are ignored if
1865@code{DT_RUNPATH} entries exist.
1866@item
252b5132
RH
1867The default directories, normally @file{/lib} and @file{/usr/lib}.
1868@item
1869For a native linker on an ELF system, if the file @file{/etc/ld.so.conf}
1870exists, the list of directories found in that file.
1871@end enumerate
1872
1873If the required shared library is not found, the linker will issue a
1874warning and continue with the link.
1875@end ifset
1876
1877@kindex -shared
1878@kindex -Bshareable
1879@item -shared
1880@itemx -Bshareable
1881@cindex shared libraries
1882Create a shared library. This is currently only supported on ELF, XCOFF
1883and SunOS platforms. On SunOS, the linker will automatically create a
ff5dcc92 1884shared library if the @option{-e} option is not used and there are
252b5132
RH
1885undefined symbols in the link.
1886
252b5132 1887@kindex --sort-common
2509a395
SL
1888@item --sort-common
1889@itemx --sort-common=ascending
1890@itemx --sort-common=descending
de7dd2bd
NC
1891This option tells @command{ld} to sort the common symbols by alignment in
1892ascending or descending order when it places them in the appropriate output
1893sections. The symbol alignments considered are sixteen-byte or larger,
1894eight-byte, four-byte, two-byte, and one-byte. This is to prevent gaps
1895between symbols due to alignment constraints. If no sorting order is
1896specified, then descending order is assumed.
252b5132 1897
2509a395
SL
1898@kindex --sort-section=name
1899@item --sort-section=name
bcaa7b3e
L
1900This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_NAME} to all wildcard section
1901patterns in the linker script.
1902
2509a395
SL
1903@kindex --sort-section=alignment
1904@item --sort-section=alignment
bcaa7b3e
L
1905This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} to all wildcard section
1906patterns in the linker script.
1907
252b5132 1908@kindex --split-by-file
2509a395 1909@item --split-by-file[=@var{size}]
ff5dcc92 1910Similar to @option{--split-by-reloc} but creates a new output section for
a854a4a7
AM
1911each input file when @var{size} is reached. @var{size} defaults to a
1912size of 1 if not given.
252b5132
RH
1913
1914@kindex --split-by-reloc
2509a395 1915@item --split-by-reloc[=@var{count}]
a854a4a7 1916Tries to creates extra sections in the output file so that no single
252b5132 1917output section in the file contains more than @var{count} relocations.
a854a4a7 1918This is useful when generating huge relocatable files for downloading into
252b5132
RH
1919certain real time kernels with the COFF object file format; since COFF
1920cannot represent more than 65535 relocations in a single section. Note
1921that this will fail to work with object file formats which do not
1922support arbitrary sections. The linker will not split up individual
1923input sections for redistribution, so if a single input section contains
1924more than @var{count} relocations one output section will contain that
a854a4a7 1925many relocations. @var{count} defaults to a value of 32768.
252b5132
RH
1926
1927@kindex --stats
1928@item --stats
1929Compute and display statistics about the operation of the linker, such
1930as execution time and memory usage.
1931
2509a395 1932@kindex --sysroot=@var{directory}
e2243057
RS
1933@item --sysroot=@var{directory}
1934Use @var{directory} as the location of the sysroot, overriding the
1935configure-time default. This option is only supported by linkers
1936that were configured using @option{--with-sysroot}.
1937
252b5132
RH
1938@kindex --traditional-format
1939@cindex traditional format
1940@item --traditional-format
ff5dcc92
SC
1941For some targets, the output of @command{ld} is different in some ways from
1942the output of some existing linker. This switch requests @command{ld} to
252b5132
RH
1943use the traditional format instead.
1944
1945@cindex dbx
ff5dcc92 1946For example, on SunOS, @command{ld} combines duplicate entries in the
252b5132
RH
1947symbol string table. This can reduce the size of an output file with
1948full debugging information by over 30 percent. Unfortunately, the SunOS
1949@code{dbx} program can not read the resulting program (@code{gdb} has no
ff5dcc92 1950trouble). The @samp{--traditional-format} switch tells @command{ld} to not
252b5132
RH
1951combine duplicate entries.
1952
2509a395
SL
1953@kindex --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
1954@item --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
176355da
NC
1955Locate a section in the output file at the absolute
1956address given by @var{org}. You may use this option as many
1957times as necessary to locate multiple sections in the command
1958line.
1959@var{org} must be a single hexadecimal integer;
1960for compatibility with other linkers, you may omit the leading
1961@samp{0x} usually associated with hexadecimal values. @emph{Note:} there
1962should be no white space between @var{sectionname}, the equals
1963sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{org}.
1964
2509a395
SL
1965@kindex -Tbss=@var{org}
1966@kindex -Tdata=@var{org}
1967@kindex -Ttext=@var{org}
252b5132 1968@cindex segment origins, cmd line
2509a395
SL
1969@item -Tbss=@var{org}
1970@itemx -Tdata=@var{org}
1971@itemx -Ttext=@var{org}
1972Same as @option{--section-start}, with @code{.bss}, @code{.data} or
a6e02871 1973@code{.text} as the @var{sectionname}.
252b5132 1974
2509a395
SL
1975@kindex -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
1976@item -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
258795f5 1977@cindex text segment origin, cmd line
2b8c06a3
L
1978When creating an ELF executable, it will set the address of the first
1979byte of the text segment.
258795f5 1980
9d5777a3
RM
1981@kindex -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
1982@item -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
1983@cindex rodata segment origin, cmd line
1984When creating an ELF executable or shared object for a target where
1985the read-only data is in its own segment separate from the executable
1986text, it will set the address of the first byte of the read-only data segment.
1987
0d705e9f
AM
1988@kindex -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
1989@item -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
1990@cindex ldata segment origin, cmd line
1991When creating an ELF executable or shared object for x86-64 medium memory
1992model, it will set the address of the first byte of the ldata segment.
1993
560e09e9
NC
1994@kindex --unresolved-symbols
1995@item --unresolved-symbols=@var{method}
1996Determine how to handle unresolved symbols. There are four possible
1997values for @samp{method}:
1998
1999@table @samp
2000@item ignore-all
da8bce14 2001Do not report any unresolved symbols.
560e09e9
NC
2002
2003@item report-all
da8bce14 2004Report all unresolved symbols. This is the default.
560e09e9
NC
2005
2006@item ignore-in-object-files
2007Report unresolved symbols that are contained in shared libraries, but
2008ignore them if they come from regular object files.
2009
2010@item ignore-in-shared-libs
2011Report unresolved symbols that come from regular object files, but
2012ignore them if they come from shared libraries. This can be useful
2013when creating a dynamic binary and it is known that all the shared
2014libraries that it should be referencing are included on the linker's
2015command line.
2016@end table
2017
2018The behaviour for shared libraries on their own can also be controlled
2019by the @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} option.
2020
2021Normally the linker will generate an error message for each reported
2022unresolved symbol but the option @option{--warn-unresolved-symbols}
2023can change this to a warning.
2024
1715a13c
L
2025@kindex --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
2026@cindex verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
252b5132 2027@item --dll-verbose
1715a13c 2028@itemx --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
ff5dcc92 2029Display the version number for @command{ld} and list the linker emulations
252b5132 2030supported. Display which input files can and cannot be opened. Display
1715a13c
L
2031the linker script being used by the linker. If the optional @var{NUMBER}
2032argument > 1, plugin symbol status will also be displayed.
252b5132
RH
2033
2034@kindex --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
2035@cindex version script, symbol versions
2509a395 2036@item --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
252b5132
RH
2037Specify the name of a version script to the linker. This is typically
2038used when creating shared libraries to specify additional information
36f63dca 2039about the version hierarchy for the library being created. This option
09e2aba4
DK
2040is only fully supported on ELF platforms which support shared libraries;
2041see @ref{VERSION}. It is partially supported on PE platforms, which can
2042use version scripts to filter symbol visibility in auto-export mode: any
2043symbols marked @samp{local} in the version script will not be exported.
2044@xref{WIN32}.
252b5132 2045
7ce691ae 2046@kindex --warn-common
252b5132
RH
2047@cindex warnings, on combining symbols
2048@cindex combining symbols, warnings on
2049@item --warn-common
2050Warn when a common symbol is combined with another common symbol or with
11e7fd74 2051a symbol definition. Unix linkers allow this somewhat sloppy practice,
252b5132
RH
2052but linkers on some other operating systems do not. This option allows
2053you to find potential problems from combining global symbols.
11e7fd74 2054Unfortunately, some C libraries use this practice, so you may get some
252b5132
RH
2055warnings about symbols in the libraries as well as in your programs.
2056
2057There are three kinds of global symbols, illustrated here by C examples:
2058
2059@table @samp
2060@item int i = 1;
2061A definition, which goes in the initialized data section of the output
2062file.
2063
2064@item extern int i;
2065An undefined reference, which does not allocate space.
2066There must be either a definition or a common symbol for the
2067variable somewhere.
2068
2069@item int i;
2070A common symbol. If there are only (one or more) common symbols for a
2071variable, it goes in the uninitialized data area of the output file.
2072The linker merges multiple common symbols for the same variable into a
2073single symbol. If they are of different sizes, it picks the largest
2074size. The linker turns a common symbol into a declaration, if there is
2075a definition of the same variable.
2076@end table
2077
2078The @samp{--warn-common} option can produce five kinds of warnings.
2079Each warning consists of a pair of lines: the first describes the symbol
2080just encountered, and the second describes the previous symbol
2081encountered with the same name. One or both of the two symbols will be
2082a common symbol.
2083
2084@enumerate
2085@item
2086Turning a common symbol into a reference, because there is already a
2087definition for the symbol.
2088@smallexample
2089@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2090 overridden by definition
2091@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: defined here
2092@end smallexample
2093
2094@item
2095Turning a common symbol into a reference, because a later definition for
2096the symbol is encountered. This is the same as the previous case,
2097except that the symbols are encountered in a different order.
2098@smallexample
2099@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: definition of `@var{symbol}'
2100 overriding common
2101@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common is here
2102@end smallexample
2103
2104@item
2105Merging a common symbol with a previous same-sized common symbol.
2106@smallexample
2107@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: multiple common
2108 of `@var{symbol}'
2109@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: previous common is here
2110@end smallexample
2111
2112@item
2113Merging a common symbol with a previous larger common symbol.
2114@smallexample
2115@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2116 overridden by larger common
2117@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: larger common is here
2118@end smallexample
2119
2120@item
2121Merging a common symbol with a previous smaller common symbol. This is
2122the same as the previous case, except that the symbols are
2123encountered in a different order.
2124@smallexample
2125@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2126 overriding smaller common
2127@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: smaller common is here
2128@end smallexample
2129@end enumerate
2130
2131@kindex --warn-constructors
2132@item --warn-constructors
2133Warn if any global constructors are used. This is only useful for a few
2134object file formats. For formats like COFF or ELF, the linker can not
2135detect the use of global constructors.
2136
2137@kindex --warn-multiple-gp
2138@item --warn-multiple-gp
2139Warn if multiple global pointer values are required in the output file.
2140This is only meaningful for certain processors, such as the Alpha.
2141Specifically, some processors put large-valued constants in a special
2142section. A special register (the global pointer) points into the middle
2143of this section, so that constants can be loaded efficiently via a
2144base-register relative addressing mode. Since the offset in
2145base-register relative mode is fixed and relatively small (e.g., 16
2146bits), this limits the maximum size of the constant pool. Thus, in
2147large programs, it is often necessary to use multiple global pointer
2148values in order to be able to address all possible constants. This
2149option causes a warning to be issued whenever this case occurs.
2150
2151@kindex --warn-once
2152@cindex warnings, on undefined symbols
2153@cindex undefined symbols, warnings on
2154@item --warn-once
2155Only warn once for each undefined symbol, rather than once per module
2156which refers to it.
2157
2158@kindex --warn-section-align
2159@cindex warnings, on section alignment
2160@cindex section alignment, warnings on
2161@item --warn-section-align
2162Warn if the address of an output section is changed because of
2163alignment. Typically, the alignment will be set by an input section.
2164The address will only be changed if it not explicitly specified; that
2165is, if the @code{SECTIONS} command does not specify a start address for
2166the section (@pxref{SECTIONS}).
2167
8fdd7217
NC
2168@kindex --warn-shared-textrel
2169@item --warn-shared-textrel
ece2d90e 2170Warn if the linker adds a DT_TEXTREL to a shared object.
8fdd7217 2171
a0c402a5
L
2172@kindex --warn-alternate-em
2173@item --warn-alternate-em
2174Warn if an object has alternate ELF machine code.
2175
560e09e9
NC
2176@kindex --warn-unresolved-symbols
2177@item --warn-unresolved-symbols
2178If the linker is going to report an unresolved symbol (see the option
2179@option{--unresolved-symbols}) it will normally generate an error.
2180This option makes it generate a warning instead.
2181
2182@kindex --error-unresolved-symbols
2183@item --error-unresolved-symbols
2184This restores the linker's default behaviour of generating errors when
2185it is reporting unresolved symbols.
2186
252b5132
RH
2187@kindex --whole-archive
2188@cindex including an entire archive
2189@item --whole-archive
2190For each archive mentioned on the command line after the
ff5dcc92 2191@option{--whole-archive} option, include every object file in the archive
252b5132
RH
2192in the link, rather than searching the archive for the required object
2193files. This is normally used to turn an archive file into a shared
2194library, forcing every object to be included in the resulting shared
2195library. This option may be used more than once.
2196
7ec229ce 2197Two notes when using this option from gcc: First, gcc doesn't know
ff5dcc92
SC
2198about this option, so you have to use @option{-Wl,-whole-archive}.
2199Second, don't forget to use @option{-Wl,-no-whole-archive} after your
7ec229ce
DD
2200list of archives, because gcc will add its own list of archives to
2201your link and you may not want this flag to affect those as well.
2202
2509a395
SL
2203@kindex --wrap=@var{symbol}
2204@item --wrap=@var{symbol}
252b5132
RH
2205Use a wrapper function for @var{symbol}. Any undefined reference to
2206@var{symbol} will be resolved to @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. Any
2207undefined reference to @code{__real_@var{symbol}} will be resolved to
2208@var{symbol}.
2209
2210This can be used to provide a wrapper for a system function. The
2211wrapper function should be called @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. If it
2212wishes to call the system function, it should call
2213@code{__real_@var{symbol}}.
2214
2215Here is a trivial example:
2216
2217@smallexample
2218void *
cc2f008e 2219__wrap_malloc (size_t c)
252b5132 2220@{
cc2f008e 2221 printf ("malloc called with %zu\n", c);
252b5132
RH
2222 return __real_malloc (c);
2223@}
2224@end smallexample
2225
ff5dcc92 2226If you link other code with this file using @option{--wrap malloc}, then
252b5132
RH
2227all calls to @code{malloc} will call the function @code{__wrap_malloc}
2228instead. The call to @code{__real_malloc} in @code{__wrap_malloc} will
2229call the real @code{malloc} function.
2230
2231You may wish to provide a @code{__real_malloc} function as well, so that
ff5dcc92 2232links without the @option{--wrap} option will succeed. If you do this,
252b5132
RH
2233you should not put the definition of @code{__real_malloc} in the same
2234file as @code{__wrap_malloc}; if you do, the assembler may resolve the
2235call before the linker has a chance to wrap it to @code{malloc}.
2236
6aa29e7b
JJ
2237@kindex --eh-frame-hdr
2238@item --eh-frame-hdr
2239Request creation of @code{.eh_frame_hdr} section and ELF
2240@code{PT_GNU_EH_FRAME} segment header.
2241
e41b3a13
JJ
2242@kindex --ld-generated-unwind-info
2243@item --no-ld-generated-unwind-info
2244Request creation of @code{.eh_frame} unwind info for linker
2245generated code sections like PLT. This option is on by default
2246if linker generated unwind info is supported.
2247
6c1439be
L
2248@kindex --enable-new-dtags
2249@kindex --disable-new-dtags
2250@item --enable-new-dtags
2251@itemx --disable-new-dtags
2252This linker can create the new dynamic tags in ELF. But the older ELF
2253systems may not understand them. If you specify
b1b00fcc
MF
2254@option{--enable-new-dtags}, the new dynamic tags will be created as needed
2255and older dynamic tags will be omitted.
ff5dcc92 2256If you specify @option{--disable-new-dtags}, no new dynamic tags will be
6c1439be
L
2257created. By default, the new dynamic tags are not created. Note that
2258those options are only available for ELF systems.
2259
2d643429 2260@kindex --hash-size=@var{number}
e185dd51 2261@item --hash-size=@var{number}
2d643429
NC
2262Set the default size of the linker's hash tables to a prime number
2263close to @var{number}. Increasing this value can reduce the length of
2264time it takes the linker to perform its tasks, at the expense of
2265increasing the linker's memory requirements. Similarly reducing this
2266value can reduce the memory requirements at the expense of speed.
2267
fdc90cb4
JJ
2268@kindex --hash-style=@var{style}
2269@item --hash-style=@var{style}
2270Set the type of linker's hash table(s). @var{style} can be either
2271@code{sysv} for classic ELF @code{.hash} section, @code{gnu} for
2272new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash} section or @code{both} for both
2273the classic ELF @code{.hash} and new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash}
2274hash tables. The default is @code{sysv}.
2275
0ce398f1
L
2276@kindex --compress-debug-sections=none
2277@kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib
2278@kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
2279@kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
2280@item --compress-debug-sections=none
2281@itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib
2282@itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
2283@itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
2284On ELF platforms , these options control how DWARF debug sections are
2285compressed using zlib. @option{--compress-debug-sections=none} doesn't
19a7fe52
L
2286compress DWARF debug sections.
2287@option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu} compresses DWARF debug
0ce398f1 2288sections and rename debug section names to begin with @samp{.zdebug}
19a7fe52
L
2289instead of @samp{.debug}. @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib}
2290and @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi}
2291compress DWARF debug sections with SHF_COMPRESSED from the ELF ABI.
6c3bc0f8
NC
2292The default behaviour varies depending upon the target involved and
2293the configure options used to build the toolchain. The default can be
2294determined by examing the output from the linker's @option{--help} option.
0ce398f1 2295
35835446
JR
2296@kindex --reduce-memory-overheads
2297@item --reduce-memory-overheads
2298This option reduces memory requirements at ld runtime, at the expense of
f2a8f148 2299linking speed. This was introduced to select the old O(n^2) algorithm
35835446 2300for link map file generation, rather than the new O(n) algorithm which uses
2d643429
NC
2301about 40% more memory for symbol storage.
2302
4f9c04f7 2303Another effect of the switch is to set the default hash table size to
2d643429 23041021, which again saves memory at the cost of lengthening the linker's
a85785bc 2305run time. This is not done however if the @option{--hash-size} switch
2d643429
NC
2306has been used.
2307
2308The @option{--reduce-memory-overheads} switch may be also be used to
2309enable other tradeoffs in future versions of the linker.
35835446 2310
c0065db7
RM
2311@kindex --build-id
2312@kindex --build-id=@var{style}
2313@item --build-id
2314@itemx --build-id=@var{style}
61e2488c 2315Request the creation of a @code{.note.gnu.build-id} ELF note section
6033bf41 2316or a @code{.buildid} COFF section. The contents of the note are
61e2488c
JT
2317unique bits identifying this linked file. @var{style} can be
2318@code{uuid} to use 128 random bits, @code{sha1} to use a 160-bit
2319@sc{SHA1} hash on the normative parts of the output contents,
2320@code{md5} to use a 128-bit @sc{MD5} hash on the normative parts of
2321the output contents, or @code{0x@var{hexstring}} to use a chosen bit
2322string specified as an even number of hexadecimal digits (@code{-} and
2323@code{:} characters between digit pairs are ignored). If @var{style}
2324is omitted, @code{sha1} is used.
24382dca
RM
2325
2326The @code{md5} and @code{sha1} styles produces an identifier
2327that is always the same in an identical output file, but will be
2328unique among all nonidentical output files. It is not intended
2329to be compared as a checksum for the file's contents. A linked
2330file may be changed later by other tools, but the build ID bit
2331string identifying the original linked file does not change.
c0065db7
RM
2332
2333Passing @code{none} for @var{style} disables the setting from any
2334@code{--build-id} options earlier on the command line.
252b5132
RH
2335@end table
2336
0285c67d
NC
2337@c man end
2338
36f63dca 2339@subsection Options Specific to i386 PE Targets
252b5132 2340
0285c67d
NC
2341@c man begin OPTIONS
2342
ff5dcc92 2343The i386 PE linker supports the @option{-shared} option, which causes
252b5132
RH
2344the output to be a dynamically linked library (DLL) instead of a
2345normal executable. You should name the output @code{*.dll} when you
2346use this option. In addition, the linker fully supports the standard
2347@code{*.def} files, which may be specified on the linker command line
2348like an object file (in fact, it should precede archives it exports
2349symbols from, to ensure that they get linked in, just like a normal
2350object file).
2351
2352In addition to the options common to all targets, the i386 PE linker
2353support additional command line options that are specific to the i386
2354PE target. Options that take values may be separated from their
2355values by either a space or an equals sign.
2356
ff5dcc92 2357@table @gcctabopt
252b5132
RH
2358
2359@kindex --add-stdcall-alias
2360@item --add-stdcall-alias
2361If given, symbols with a stdcall suffix (@@@var{nn}) will be exported
2362as-is and also with the suffix stripped.
bb10df36 2363[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2364
2365@kindex --base-file
2366@item --base-file @var{file}
2367Use @var{file} as the name of a file in which to save the base
2368addresses of all the relocations needed for generating DLLs with
2369@file{dlltool}.
bb10df36 2370[This is an i386 PE specific option]
252b5132
RH
2371
2372@kindex --dll
2373@item --dll
2374Create a DLL instead of a regular executable. You may also use
ff5dcc92 2375@option{-shared} or specify a @code{LIBRARY} in a given @code{.def}
252b5132 2376file.
bb10df36 2377[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2378
88183869
DK
2379@kindex --enable-long-section-names
2380@kindex --disable-long-section-names
2381@item --enable-long-section-names
2382@itemx --disable-long-section-names
56e6cf80 2383The PE variants of the COFF object format add an extension that permits
88183869 2384the use of section names longer than eight characters, the normal limit
56e6cf80
NC
2385for COFF. By default, these names are only allowed in object files, as
2386fully-linked executable images do not carry the COFF string table required
88183869
DK
2387to support the longer names. As a GNU extension, it is possible to
2388allow their use in executable images as well, or to (probably pointlessly!)
2389disallow it in object files, by using these two options. Executable images
2390generated with these long section names are slightly non-standard, carrying
2391as they do a string table, and may generate confusing output when examined
9d5777a3
RM
2392with non-GNU PE-aware tools, such as file viewers and dumpers. However,
2393GDB relies on the use of PE long section names to find Dwarf-2 debug
3efd345c
DK
2394information sections in an executable image at runtime, and so if neither
2395option is specified on the command-line, @command{ld} will enable long
2396section names, overriding the default and technically correct behaviour,
2397when it finds the presence of debug information while linking an executable
2398image and not stripping symbols.
88183869
DK
2399[This option is valid for all PE targeted ports of the linker]
2400
252b5132
RH
2401@kindex --enable-stdcall-fixup
2402@kindex --disable-stdcall-fixup
2403@item --enable-stdcall-fixup
2404@itemx --disable-stdcall-fixup
2405If the link finds a symbol that it cannot resolve, it will attempt to
36f63dca 2406do ``fuzzy linking'' by looking for another defined symbol that differs
252b5132
RH
2407only in the format of the symbol name (cdecl vs stdcall) and will
2408resolve that symbol by linking to the match. For example, the
2409undefined symbol @code{_foo} might be linked to the function
2410@code{_foo@@12}, or the undefined symbol @code{_bar@@16} might be linked
2411to the function @code{_bar}. When the linker does this, it prints a
2412warning, since it normally should have failed to link, but sometimes
2413import libraries generated from third-party dlls may need this feature
ff5dcc92 2414to be usable. If you specify @option{--enable-stdcall-fixup}, this
252b5132 2415feature is fully enabled and warnings are not printed. If you specify
ff5dcc92 2416@option{--disable-stdcall-fixup}, this feature is disabled and such
252b5132 2417mismatches are considered to be errors.
bb10df36 2418[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2419
522f09cd
KT
2420@kindex --leading-underscore
2421@kindex --no-leading-underscore
2422@item --leading-underscore
2423@itemx --no-leading-underscore
2424For most targets default symbol-prefix is an underscore and is defined
2425in target's description. By this option it is possible to
2426disable/enable the default underscore symbol-prefix.
2427
252b5132
RH
2428@cindex DLLs, creating
2429@kindex --export-all-symbols
2430@item --export-all-symbols
2431If given, all global symbols in the objects used to build a DLL will
2432be exported by the DLL. Note that this is the default if there
2433otherwise wouldn't be any exported symbols. When symbols are
2434explicitly exported via DEF files or implicitly exported via function
2435attributes, the default is to not export anything else unless this
2436option is given. Note that the symbols @code{DllMain@@12},
ece2d90e 2437@code{DllEntryPoint@@0}, @code{DllMainCRTStartup@@12}, and
b044cda1 2438@code{impure_ptr} will not be automatically
ece2d90e
NC
2439exported. Also, symbols imported from other DLLs will not be
2440re-exported, nor will symbols specifying the DLL's internal layout
2441such as those beginning with @code{_head_} or ending with
2442@code{_iname}. In addition, no symbols from @code{libgcc},
b044cda1
CW
2443@code{libstd++}, @code{libmingw32}, or @code{crtX.o} will be exported.
2444Symbols whose names begin with @code{__rtti_} or @code{__builtin_} will
2445not be exported, to help with C++ DLLs. Finally, there is an
ece2d90e 2446extensive list of cygwin-private symbols that are not exported
b044cda1 2447(obviously, this applies on when building DLLs for cygwin targets).
ece2d90e 2448These cygwin-excludes are: @code{_cygwin_dll_entry@@12},
b044cda1 2449@code{_cygwin_crt0_common@@8}, @code{_cygwin_noncygwin_dll_entry@@12},
ece2d90e 2450@code{_fmode}, @code{_impure_ptr}, @code{cygwin_attach_dll},
b044cda1 2451@code{cygwin_premain0}, @code{cygwin_premain1}, @code{cygwin_premain2},
ece2d90e 2452@code{cygwin_premain3}, and @code{environ}.
bb10df36 2453[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2454
2455@kindex --exclude-symbols
1d0a3c9c 2456@item --exclude-symbols @var{symbol},@var{symbol},...
252b5132
RH
2457Specifies a list of symbols which should not be automatically
2458exported. The symbol names may be delimited by commas or colons.
bb10df36 2459[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2460
2927aaca
NC
2461@kindex --exclude-all-symbols
2462@item --exclude-all-symbols
2463Specifies no symbols should be automatically exported.
2464[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2465
252b5132
RH
2466@kindex --file-alignment
2467@item --file-alignment
2468Specify the file alignment. Sections in the file will always begin at
2469file offsets which are multiples of this number. This defaults to
2470512.
bb10df36 2471[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2472
2473@cindex heap size
2474@kindex --heap
2475@item --heap @var{reserve}
2476@itemx --heap @var{reserve},@var{commit}
a00b50c5 2477Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
fe6d7d6a 2478to be used as heap for this program. The default is 1MB reserved, 4K
252b5132 2479committed.
bb10df36 2480[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2481
2482@cindex image base
2483@kindex --image-base
2484@item --image-base @var{value}
2485Use @var{value} as the base address of your program or dll. This is
2486the lowest memory location that will be used when your program or dll
2487is loaded. To reduce the need to relocate and improve performance of
2488your dlls, each should have a unique base address and not overlap any
2489other dlls. The default is 0x400000 for executables, and 0x10000000
2490for dlls.
bb10df36 2491[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2492
2493@kindex --kill-at
2494@item --kill-at
2495If given, the stdcall suffixes (@@@var{nn}) will be stripped from
2496symbols before they are exported.
bb10df36 2497[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2498
26d2d8a2
BF
2499@kindex --large-address-aware
2500@item --large-address-aware
b45619c0 2501If given, the appropriate bit in the ``Characteristics'' field of the COFF
26d2d8a2 2502header is set to indicate that this executable supports virtual addresses
b45619c0 2503greater than 2 gigabytes. This should be used in conjunction with the /3GB
26d2d8a2
BF
2504or /USERVA=@var{value} megabytes switch in the ``[operating systems]''
2505section of the BOOT.INI. Otherwise, this bit has no effect.
2506[This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2507
f69a2f97
NC
2508@kindex --disable-large-address-aware
2509@item --disable-large-address-aware
2510Reverts the effect of a previous @samp{--large-address-aware} option.
2511This is useful if @samp{--large-address-aware} is always set by the compiler
2512driver (e.g. Cygwin gcc) and the executable does not support virtual
2513addresses greater than 2 gigabytes.
2514[This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2515
252b5132
RH
2516@kindex --major-image-version
2517@item --major-image-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2518Sets the major number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 1.
bb10df36 2519[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2520
2521@kindex --major-os-version
2522@item --major-os-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2523Sets the major number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 4.
bb10df36 2524[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2525
2526@kindex --major-subsystem-version
2527@item --major-subsystem-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2528Sets the major number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 4.
bb10df36 2529[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2530
2531@kindex --minor-image-version
2532@item --minor-image-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2533Sets the minor number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2534[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2535
2536@kindex --minor-os-version
2537@item --minor-os-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2538Sets the minor number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2539[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2540
2541@kindex --minor-subsystem-version
2542@item --minor-subsystem-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2543Sets the minor number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2544[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2545
2546@cindex DEF files, creating
2547@cindex DLLs, creating
2548@kindex --output-def
2549@item --output-def @var{file}
2550The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain a DEF
2551file corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This DEF file
2552(which should be called @code{*.def}) may be used to create an import
2553library with @code{dlltool} or may be used as a reference to
2554automatically or implicitly exported symbols.
bb10df36 2555[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2556
b044cda1
CW
2557@cindex DLLs, creating
2558@kindex --out-implib
2559@item --out-implib @var{file}
2560The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain an
2561import lib corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This
2562import lib (which should be called @code{*.dll.a} or @code{*.a}
560e09e9 2563may be used to link clients against the generated DLL; this behaviour
b044cda1
CW
2564makes it possible to skip a separate @code{dlltool} import library
2565creation step.
bb10df36 2566[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2567
2568@kindex --enable-auto-image-base
2569@item --enable-auto-image-base
d0e6d77b
CF
2570@itemx --enable-auto-image-base=@var{value}
2571Automatically choose the image base for DLLs, optionally starting with base
2572@var{value}, unless one is specified using the @code{--image-base} argument.
2573By using a hash generated from the dllname to create unique image bases
2574for each DLL, in-memory collisions and relocations which can delay program
2575execution are avoided.
bb10df36 2576[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2577
2578@kindex --disable-auto-image-base
2579@item --disable-auto-image-base
2580Do not automatically generate a unique image base. If there is no
2581user-specified image base (@code{--image-base}) then use the platform
2582default.
bb10df36 2583[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2584
2585@cindex DLLs, linking to
2586@kindex --dll-search-prefix
2587@item --dll-search-prefix @var{string}
489d0400 2588When linking dynamically to a dll without an import library,
ece2d90e 2589search for @code{<string><basename>.dll} in preference to
560e09e9 2590@code{lib<basename>.dll}. This behaviour allows easy distinction
b044cda1
CW
2591between DLLs built for the various "subplatforms": native, cygwin,
2592uwin, pw, etc. For instance, cygwin DLLs typically use
ece2d90e 2593@code{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}.
bb10df36 2594[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2595
2596@kindex --enable-auto-import
2597@item --enable-auto-import
ece2d90e
NC
2598Do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to @code{__imp__symbol} for
2599DATA imports from DLLs, and create the necessary thunking symbols when
4d8907ac
DS
2600building the import libraries with those DATA exports. Note: Use of the
2601'auto-import' extension will cause the text section of the image file
2602to be made writable. This does not conform to the PE-COFF format
2603specification published by Microsoft.
2604
e2a83dd0
NC
2605Note - use of the 'auto-import' extension will also cause read only
2606data which would normally be placed into the .rdata section to be
2607placed into the .data section instead. This is in order to work
2608around a problem with consts that is described here:
2609http://www.cygwin.com/ml/cygwin/2004-09/msg01101.html
2610
4d8907ac
DS
2611Using 'auto-import' generally will 'just work' -- but sometimes you may
2612see this message:
0d888aac 2613
ece2d90e 2614"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
0d888aac
CW
2615documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
2616
ece2d90e
NC
2617This message occurs when some (sub)expression accesses an address
2618ultimately given by the sum of two constants (Win32 import tables only
c0065db7
RM
2619allow one). Instances where this may occur include accesses to member
2620fields of struct variables imported from a DLL, as well as using a
2621constant index into an array variable imported from a DLL. Any
2f8d8971
NC
2622multiword variable (arrays, structs, long long, etc) may trigger
2623this error condition. However, regardless of the exact data type
2624of the offending exported variable, ld will always detect it, issue
2625the warning, and exit.
2626
2627There are several ways to address this difficulty, regardless of the
2628data type of the exported variable:
0d888aac 2629
2fa9fc65
NC
2630One way is to use --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc switch. This leaves the task
2631of adjusting references in your client code for runtime environment, so
560e09e9 2632this method works only when runtime environment supports this feature.
2fa9fc65 2633
c0065db7
RM
2634A second solution is to force one of the 'constants' to be a variable --
2635that is, unknown and un-optimizable at compile time. For arrays,
2636there are two possibilities: a) make the indexee (the array's address)
0d888aac
CW
2637a variable, or b) make the 'constant' index a variable. Thus:
2638
2639@example
2640extern type extern_array[];
c0065db7 2641extern_array[1] -->
0d888aac
CW
2642 @{ volatile type *t=extern_array; t[1] @}
2643@end example
2644
2645or
2646
2647@example
2648extern type extern_array[];
c0065db7 2649extern_array[1] -->
0d888aac
CW
2650 @{ volatile int t=1; extern_array[t] @}
2651@end example
2652
c0065db7 2653For structs (and most other multiword data types) the only option
2f8d8971 2654is to make the struct itself (or the long long, or the ...) variable:
0d888aac
CW
2655
2656@example
2657extern struct s extern_struct;
c0065db7 2658extern_struct.field -->
0d888aac
CW
2659 @{ volatile struct s *t=&extern_struct; t->field @}
2660@end example
2661
c406afaf
NC
2662or
2663
2664@example
2665extern long long extern_ll;
2666extern_ll -->
2667 @{ volatile long long * local_ll=&extern_ll; *local_ll @}
2668@end example
2669
2fa9fc65 2670A third method of dealing with this difficulty is to abandon
c0065db7 2671'auto-import' for the offending symbol and mark it with
11e7fd74 2672@code{__declspec(dllimport)}. However, in practice that
0d888aac 2673requires using compile-time #defines to indicate whether you are
c0065db7
RM
2674building a DLL, building client code that will link to the DLL, or
2675merely building/linking to a static library. In making the choice
2676between the various methods of resolving the 'direct address with
0d888aac
CW
2677constant offset' problem, you should consider typical real-world usage:
2678
2679Original:
2680@example
2681--foo.h
2682extern int arr[];
2683--foo.c
2684#include "foo.h"
2685void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2686 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2687@}
2688@end example
2689
2690Solution 1:
2691@example
2692--foo.h
2693extern int arr[];
2694--foo.c
2695#include "foo.h"
2696void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2697 /* This workaround is for win32 and cygwin; do not "optimize" */
2698 volatile int *parr = arr;
2699 printf("%d\n",parr[1]);
2700@}
2701@end example
2702
2703Solution 2:
2704@example
2705--foo.h
2706/* Note: auto-export is assumed (no __declspec(dllexport)) */
2707#if (defined(_WIN32) || defined(__CYGWIN__)) && \
2708 !(defined(FOO_BUILD_DLL) || defined(FOO_STATIC))
2709#define FOO_IMPORT __declspec(dllimport)
2710#else
2711#define FOO_IMPORT
2712#endif
2713extern FOO_IMPORT int arr[];
2714--foo.c
2715#include "foo.h"
2716void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2717 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2718@}
2719@end example
2720
c0065db7 2721A fourth way to avoid this problem is to re-code your
0d888aac
CW
2722library to use a functional interface rather than a data interface
2723for the offending variables (e.g. set_foo() and get_foo() accessor
2724functions).
bb10df36 2725[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2726
2727@kindex --disable-auto-import
2728@item --disable-auto-import
c0065db7 2729Do not attempt to do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to
b044cda1 2730@code{__imp__symbol} for DATA imports from DLLs.
bb10df36 2731[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1 2732
2fa9fc65
NC
2733@kindex --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2734@item --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2735If your code contains expressions described in --enable-auto-import section,
2736that is, DATA imports from DLL with non-zero offset, this switch will create
2737a vector of 'runtime pseudo relocations' which can be used by runtime
c0065db7 2738environment to adjust references to such data in your client code.
bb10df36 2739[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2fa9fc65
NC
2740
2741@kindex --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2742@item --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2743Do not create pseudo relocations for non-zero offset DATA imports from
676ee43b 2744DLLs.
bb10df36 2745[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2fa9fc65 2746
b044cda1
CW
2747@kindex --enable-extra-pe-debug
2748@item --enable-extra-pe-debug
2749Show additional debug info related to auto-import symbol thunking.
bb10df36 2750[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1 2751
252b5132
RH
2752@kindex --section-alignment
2753@item --section-alignment
2754Sets the section alignment. Sections in memory will always begin at
2755addresses which are a multiple of this number. Defaults to 0x1000.
bb10df36 2756[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2757
2758@cindex stack size
2759@kindex --stack
2760@item --stack @var{reserve}
2761@itemx --stack @var{reserve},@var{commit}
a00b50c5 2762Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
fe6d7d6a 2763to be used as stack for this program. The default is 2MB reserved, 4K
252b5132 2764committed.
bb10df36 2765[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2766
2767@kindex --subsystem
2768@item --subsystem @var{which}
2769@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}
2770@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}.@var{minor}
2771Specifies the subsystem under which your program will execute. The
2772legal values for @var{which} are @code{native}, @code{windows},
33f362e1
NC
2773@code{console}, @code{posix}, and @code{xbox}. You may optionally set
2774the subsystem version also. Numeric values are also accepted for
2775@var{which}.
bb10df36 2776[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2777
2f563b51
DK
2778The following options set flags in the @code{DllCharacteristics} field
2779of the PE file header:
2780[These options are specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2781
2d5c3743
NC
2782@kindex --high-entropy-va
2783@item --high-entropy-va
2784Image is compatible with 64-bit address space layout randomization
2785(ASLR).
2786
2f563b51
DK
2787@kindex --dynamicbase
2788@item --dynamicbase
2789The image base address may be relocated using address space layout
2790randomization (ASLR). This feature was introduced with MS Windows
2791Vista for i386 PE targets.
2792
2793@kindex --forceinteg
2794@item --forceinteg
2795Code integrity checks are enforced.
2796
2797@kindex --nxcompat
2798@item --nxcompat
2799The image is compatible with the Data Execution Prevention.
2800This feature was introduced with MS Windows XP SP2 for i386 PE targets.
2801
2802@kindex --no-isolation
2803@item --no-isolation
2804Although the image understands isolation, do not isolate the image.
2805
2806@kindex --no-seh
2807@item --no-seh
2808The image does not use SEH. No SE handler may be called from
2809this image.
2810
2811@kindex --no-bind
2812@item --no-bind
2813Do not bind this image.
2814
2815@kindex --wdmdriver
2816@item --wdmdriver
2817The driver uses the MS Windows Driver Model.
9d5777a3 2818
2f563b51
DK
2819@kindex --tsaware
2820@item --tsaware
2821The image is Terminal Server aware.
2822
0cb112f7
CF
2823@kindex --insert-timestamp
2824@item --insert-timestamp
eeb14e5a
LZ
2825@itemx --no-insert-timestamp
2826Insert a real timestamp into the image. This is the default behaviour
2827as it matches legacy code and it means that the image will work with
2828other, proprietary tools. The problem with this default is that it
56e6cf80 2829will result in slightly different images being produced each time the
eeb14e5a
LZ
2830same sources are linked. The option @option{--no-insert-timestamp}
2831can be used to insert a zero value for the timestamp, this ensuring
56e6cf80 2832that binaries produced from identical sources will compare
eeb14e5a 2833identically.
252b5132
RH
2834@end table
2835
0285c67d
NC
2836@c man end
2837
ac145307
BS
2838@ifset C6X
2839@subsection Options specific to C6X uClinux targets
2840
2841@c man begin OPTIONS
2842
2843The C6X uClinux target uses a binary format called DSBT to support shared
2844libraries. Each shared library in the system needs to have a unique index;
2845all executables use an index of 0.
2846
2847@table @gcctabopt
2848
2849@kindex --dsbt-size
2850@item --dsbt-size @var{size}
56e6cf80 2851This option sets the number of entries in the DSBT of the current executable
ac145307
BS
2852or shared library to @var{size}. The default is to create a table with 64
2853entries.
2854
2855@kindex --dsbt-index
2856@item --dsbt-index @var{index}
2857This option sets the DSBT index of the current executable or shared library
2858to @var{index}. The default is 0, which is appropriate for generating
2859executables. If a shared library is generated with a DSBT index of 0, the
2860@code{R_C6000_DSBT_INDEX} relocs are copied into the output file.
2861
fbd9ad90
PB
2862@kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
2863The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent
2864exidx entries in frame unwind info.
2865
ac145307
BS
2866@end table
2867
2868@c man end
2869@end ifset
2870
93fd0973
SC
2871@ifset M68HC11
2872@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 targets
2873
2874@c man begin OPTIONS
2875
2876The 68HC11 and 68HC12 linkers support specific options to control the
2877memory bank switching mapping and trampoline code generation.
2878
2879@table @gcctabopt
2880
2881@kindex --no-trampoline
2882@item --no-trampoline
2883This option disables the generation of trampoline. By default a trampoline
2884is generated for each far function which is called using a @code{jsr}
2885instruction (this happens when a pointer to a far function is taken).
2886
2887@kindex --bank-window
2888@item --bank-window @var{name}
2889This option indicates to the linker the name of the memory region in
2890the @samp{MEMORY} specification that describes the memory bank window.
2891The definition of such region is then used by the linker to compute
2892paging and addresses within the memory window.
2893
2894@end table
2895
2896@c man end
2897@end ifset
2898
7fb9f789
NC
2899@ifset M68K
2900@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68K target
2901
2902@c man begin OPTIONS
2903
2904The following options are supported to control handling of GOT generation
2905when linking for 68K targets.
2906
2907@table @gcctabopt
2908
2909@kindex --got
2910@item --got=@var{type}
2911This option tells the linker which GOT generation scheme to use.
2912@var{type} should be one of @samp{single}, @samp{negative},
2913@samp{multigot} or @samp{target}. For more information refer to the
2914Info entry for @file{ld}.
2915
2916@end table
2917
2918@c man end
2919@end ifset
2920
833794fc
MR
2921@ifset MIPS
2922@subsection Options specific to MIPS targets
2923
2924@c man begin OPTIONS
2925
2926The following options are supported to control microMIPS instruction
2927generation when linking for MIPS targets.
2928
2929@table @gcctabopt
2930
2931@kindex --insn32
2932@item --insn32
2933@kindex --no-insn32
2934@itemx --no-insn32
2935These options control the choice of microMIPS instructions used in code
2936generated by the linker, such as that in the PLT or lazy binding stubs,
2937or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is used, then the linker only uses
293832-bit instruction encodings. By default or if @samp{--no-insn32} is
2939used, all instruction encodings are used, including 16-bit ones where
2940possible.
2941
2942@end table
2943
2944@c man end
2945@end ifset
2946
252b5132
RH
2947@ifset UsesEnvVars
2948@node Environment
2949@section Environment Variables
2950
0285c67d
NC
2951@c man begin ENVIRONMENT
2952
560e09e9 2953You can change the behaviour of @command{ld} with the environment variables
36f63dca
NC
2954@ifclear SingleFormat
2955@code{GNUTARGET},
2956@end ifclear
2957@code{LDEMULATION} and @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}.
252b5132 2958
36f63dca 2959@ifclear SingleFormat
252b5132
RH
2960@kindex GNUTARGET
2961@cindex default input format
2962@code{GNUTARGET} determines the input-file object format if you don't
2963use @samp{-b} (or its synonym @samp{--format}). Its value should be one
2964of the BFD names for an input format (@pxref{BFD}). If there is no
ff5dcc92 2965@code{GNUTARGET} in the environment, @command{ld} uses the natural format
252b5132
RH
2966of the target. If @code{GNUTARGET} is set to @code{default} then BFD
2967attempts to discover the input format by examining binary input files;
2968this method often succeeds, but there are potential ambiguities, since
2969there is no method of ensuring that the magic number used to specify
2970object-file formats is unique. However, the configuration procedure for
2971BFD on each system places the conventional format for that system first
2972in the search-list, so ambiguities are resolved in favor of convention.
36f63dca 2973@end ifclear
252b5132
RH
2974
2975@kindex LDEMULATION
2976@cindex default emulation
2977@cindex emulation, default
2978@code{LDEMULATION} determines the default emulation if you don't use the
2979@samp{-m} option. The emulation can affect various aspects of linker
2980behaviour, particularly the default linker script. You can list the
2981available emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options. If
2982the @samp{-m} option is not used, and the @code{LDEMULATION} environment
2983variable is not defined, the default emulation depends upon how the
2984linker was configured.
252b5132
RH
2985
2986@kindex COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE
2987@cindex demangling, default
2988Normally, the linker will default to demangling symbols. However, if
2989@code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE} is set in the environment, then it will
2990default to not demangling symbols. This environment variable is used in
2991a similar fashion by the @code{gcc} linker wrapper program. The default
2992may be overridden by the @samp{--demangle} and @samp{--no-demangle}
2993options.
2994
0285c67d
NC
2995@c man end
2996@end ifset
2997
252b5132
RH
2998@node Scripts
2999@chapter Linker Scripts
3000
3001@cindex scripts
3002@cindex linker scripts
3003@cindex command files
3004Every link is controlled by a @dfn{linker script}. This script is
3005written in the linker command language.
3006
3007The main purpose of the linker script is to describe how the sections in
3008the input files should be mapped into the output file, and to control
3009the memory layout of the output file. Most linker scripts do nothing
3010more than this. However, when necessary, the linker script can also
3011direct the linker to perform many other operations, using the commands
3012described below.
3013
3014The linker always uses a linker script. If you do not supply one
3015yourself, the linker will use a default script that is compiled into the
3016linker executable. You can use the @samp{--verbose} command line option
3017to display the default linker script. Certain command line options,
3018such as @samp{-r} or @samp{-N}, will affect the default linker script.
3019
3020You may supply your own linker script by using the @samp{-T} command
3021line option. When you do this, your linker script will replace the
3022default linker script.
3023
3024You may also use linker scripts implicitly by naming them as input files
3025to the linker, as though they were files to be linked. @xref{Implicit
3026Linker Scripts}.
3027
3028@menu
3029* Basic Script Concepts:: Basic Linker Script Concepts
3030* Script Format:: Linker Script Format
3031* Simple Example:: Simple Linker Script Example
3032* Simple Commands:: Simple Linker Script Commands
3033* Assignments:: Assigning Values to Symbols
3034* SECTIONS:: SECTIONS Command
3035* MEMORY:: MEMORY Command
3036* PHDRS:: PHDRS Command
3037* VERSION:: VERSION Command
3038* Expressions:: Expressions in Linker Scripts
3039* Implicit Linker Scripts:: Implicit Linker Scripts
3040@end menu
3041
3042@node Basic Script Concepts
3043@section Basic Linker Script Concepts
3044@cindex linker script concepts
3045We need to define some basic concepts and vocabulary in order to
3046describe the linker script language.
3047
3048The linker combines input files into a single output file. The output
3049file and each input file are in a special data format known as an
3050@dfn{object file format}. Each file is called an @dfn{object file}.
3051The output file is often called an @dfn{executable}, but for our
3052purposes we will also call it an object file. Each object file has,
3053among other things, a list of @dfn{sections}. We sometimes refer to a
3054section in an input file as an @dfn{input section}; similarly, a section
3055in the output file is an @dfn{output section}.
3056
3057Each section in an object file has a name and a size. Most sections
3058also have an associated block of data, known as the @dfn{section
56dd11f0 3059contents}. A section may be marked as @dfn{loadable}, which means that
252b5132
RH
3060the contents should be loaded into memory when the output file is run.
3061A section with no contents may be @dfn{allocatable}, which means that an
3062area in memory should be set aside, but nothing in particular should be
3063loaded there (in some cases this memory must be zeroed out). A section
3064which is neither loadable nor allocatable typically contains some sort
3065of debugging information.
3066
3067Every loadable or allocatable output section has two addresses. The
3068first is the @dfn{VMA}, or virtual memory address. This is the address
3069the section will have when the output file is run. The second is the
3070@dfn{LMA}, or load memory address. This is the address at which the
3071section will be loaded. In most cases the two addresses will be the
3072same. An example of when they might be different is when a data section
3073is loaded into ROM, and then copied into RAM when the program starts up
3074(this technique is often used to initialize global variables in a ROM
3075based system). In this case the ROM address would be the LMA, and the
3076RAM address would be the VMA.
3077
3078You can see the sections in an object file by using the @code{objdump}
3079program with the @samp{-h} option.
3080
3081Every object file also has a list of @dfn{symbols}, known as the
3082@dfn{symbol table}. A symbol may be defined or undefined. Each symbol
3083has a name, and each defined symbol has an address, among other
3084information. If you compile a C or C++ program into an object file, you
3085will get a defined symbol for every defined function and global or
3086static variable. Every undefined function or global variable which is
3087referenced in the input file will become an undefined symbol.
3088
3089You can see the symbols in an object file by using the @code{nm}
3090program, or by using the @code{objdump} program with the @samp{-t}
3091option.
3092
3093@node Script Format
3094@section Linker Script Format
3095@cindex linker script format
3096Linker scripts are text files.
3097
3098You write a linker script as a series of commands. Each command is
3099either a keyword, possibly followed by arguments, or an assignment to a
3100symbol. You may separate commands using semicolons. Whitespace is
3101generally ignored.
3102
3103Strings such as file or format names can normally be entered directly.
3104If the file name contains a character such as a comma which would
3105otherwise serve to separate file names, you may put the file name in
3106double quotes. There is no way to use a double quote character in a
3107file name.
3108
3109You may include comments in linker scripts just as in C, delimited by
3110@samp{/*} and @samp{*/}. As in C, comments are syntactically equivalent
3111to whitespace.
3112
3113@node Simple Example
3114@section Simple Linker Script Example
3115@cindex linker script example
3116@cindex example of linker script
3117Many linker scripts are fairly simple.
3118
3119The simplest possible linker script has just one command:
3120@samp{SECTIONS}. You use the @samp{SECTIONS} command to describe the
3121memory layout of the output file.
3122
3123The @samp{SECTIONS} command is a powerful command. Here we will
3124describe a simple use of it. Let's assume your program consists only of
3125code, initialized data, and uninitialized data. These will be in the
3126@samp{.text}, @samp{.data}, and @samp{.bss} sections, respectively.
3127Let's assume further that these are the only sections which appear in
3128your input files.
3129
3130For this example, let's say that the code should be loaded at address
31310x10000, and that the data should start at address 0x8000000. Here is a
3132linker script which will do that:
3133@smallexample
3134SECTIONS
3135@{
3136 . = 0x10000;
3137 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
3138 . = 0x8000000;
3139 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3140 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
3141@}
3142@end smallexample
3143
3144You write the @samp{SECTIONS} command as the keyword @samp{SECTIONS},
3145followed by a series of symbol assignments and output section
3146descriptions enclosed in curly braces.
3147
252b5132
RH
3148The first line inside the @samp{SECTIONS} command of the above example
3149sets the value of the special symbol @samp{.}, which is the location
3150counter. If you do not specify the address of an output section in some
3151other way (other ways are described later), the address is set from the
3152current value of the location counter. The location counter is then
3153incremented by the size of the output section. At the start of the
3154@samp{SECTIONS} command, the location counter has the value @samp{0}.
3155
3156The second line defines an output section, @samp{.text}. The colon is
3157required syntax which may be ignored for now. Within the curly braces
3158after the output section name, you list the names of the input sections
3159which should be placed into this output section. The @samp{*} is a
3160wildcard which matches any file name. The expression @samp{*(.text)}
3161means all @samp{.text} input sections in all input files.
3162
3163Since the location counter is @samp{0x10000} when the output section
3164@samp{.text} is defined, the linker will set the address of the
3165@samp{.text} section in the output file to be @samp{0x10000}.
3166
3167The remaining lines define the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss} sections in
3168the output file. The linker will place the @samp{.data} output section
3169at address @samp{0x8000000}. After the linker places the @samp{.data}
3170output section, the value of the location counter will be
3171@samp{0x8000000} plus the size of the @samp{.data} output section. The
3172effect is that the linker will place the @samp{.bss} output section
58434bc1 3173immediately after the @samp{.data} output section in memory.
252b5132
RH
3174
3175The linker will ensure that each output section has the required
3176alignment, by increasing the location counter if necessary. In this
3177example, the specified addresses for the @samp{.text} and @samp{.data}
3178sections will probably satisfy any alignment constraints, but the linker
3179may have to create a small gap between the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss}
3180sections.
3181
3182That's it! That's a simple and complete linker script.
3183
3184@node Simple Commands
3185@section Simple Linker Script Commands
3186@cindex linker script simple commands
3187In this section we describe the simple linker script commands.
3188
3189@menu
3190* Entry Point:: Setting the entry point
3191* File Commands:: Commands dealing with files
3192@ifclear SingleFormat
3193* Format Commands:: Commands dealing with object file formats
3194@end ifclear
3195
4a93e180 3196* REGION_ALIAS:: Assign alias names to memory regions
252b5132
RH
3197* Miscellaneous Commands:: Other linker script commands
3198@end menu
3199
3200@node Entry Point
36f63dca 3201@subsection Setting the Entry Point
252b5132
RH
3202@kindex ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3203@cindex start of execution
3204@cindex first instruction
3205@cindex entry point
3206The first instruction to execute in a program is called the @dfn{entry
3207point}. You can use the @code{ENTRY} linker script command to set the
3208entry point. The argument is a symbol name:
3209@smallexample
3210ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3211@end smallexample
3212
3213There are several ways to set the entry point. The linker will set the
3214entry point by trying each of the following methods in order, and
3215stopping when one of them succeeds:
3216@itemize @bullet
a1ab1d2a 3217@item
252b5132 3218the @samp{-e} @var{entry} command-line option;
a1ab1d2a 3219@item
252b5132 3220the @code{ENTRY(@var{symbol})} command in a linker script;
a1ab1d2a 3221@item
3ab904c4
NC
3222the value of a target specific symbol, if it is defined; For many
3223targets this is @code{start}, but PE and BeOS based systems for example
3224check a list of possible entry symbols, matching the first one found.
a1ab1d2a 3225@item
252b5132 3226the address of the first byte of the @samp{.text} section, if present;
a1ab1d2a 3227@item
252b5132
RH
3228The address @code{0}.
3229@end itemize
3230
3231@node File Commands
36f63dca 3232@subsection Commands Dealing with Files
252b5132
RH
3233@cindex linker script file commands
3234Several linker script commands deal with files.
3235
3236@table @code
3237@item INCLUDE @var{filename}
3238@kindex INCLUDE @var{filename}
3239@cindex including a linker script
3240Include the linker script @var{filename} at this point. The file will
3241be searched for in the current directory, and in any directory specified
ff5dcc92 3242with the @option{-L} option. You can nest calls to @code{INCLUDE} up to
252b5132
RH
324310 levels deep.
3244
4006703d
NS
3245You can place @code{INCLUDE} directives at the top level, in @code{MEMORY} or
3246@code{SECTIONS} commands, or in output section descriptions.
3247
252b5132
RH
3248@item INPUT(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3249@itemx INPUT(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3250@kindex INPUT(@var{files})
3251@cindex input files in linker scripts
3252@cindex input object files in linker scripts
3253@cindex linker script input object files
3254The @code{INPUT} command directs the linker to include the named files
3255in the link, as though they were named on the command line.
3256
3257For example, if you always want to include @file{subr.o} any time you do
3258a link, but you can't be bothered to put it on every link command line,
3259then you can put @samp{INPUT (subr.o)} in your linker script.
3260
3261In fact, if you like, you can list all of your input files in the linker
3262script, and then invoke the linker with nothing but a @samp{-T} option.
3263
e3f2db7f
AO
3264In case a @dfn{sysroot prefix} is configured, and the filename starts
3265with the @samp{/} character, and the script being processed was
3266located inside the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, the filename will be looked
3267for in the @dfn{sysroot prefix}. Otherwise, the linker will try to
3268open the file in the current directory. If it is not found, the
cad60a33
HPN
3269linker will search through the archive library search path.
3270The @dfn{sysroot prefix} can also be forced by specifying @code{=}
3271as the first character in the filename path. See also the
e3f2db7f 3272description of @samp{-L} in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
252b5132 3273
ff5dcc92 3274If you use @samp{INPUT (-l@var{file})}, @command{ld} will transform the
252b5132
RH
3275name to @code{lib@var{file}.a}, as with the command line argument
3276@samp{-l}.
3277
3278When you use the @code{INPUT} command in an implicit linker script, the
3279files will be included in the link at the point at which the linker
3280script file is included. This can affect archive searching.
3281
3282@item GROUP(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3283@itemx GROUP(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3284@kindex GROUP(@var{files})
3285@cindex grouping input files
3286The @code{GROUP} command is like @code{INPUT}, except that the named
3287files should all be archives, and they are searched repeatedly until no
3288new undefined references are created. See the description of @samp{-(}
3289in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
3290
b717d30e
JJ
3291@item AS_NEEDED(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3292@itemx AS_NEEDED(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3293@kindex AS_NEEDED(@var{files})
3294This construct can appear only inside of the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP}
3295commands, among other filenames. The files listed will be handled
3296as if they appear directly in the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} commands,
3297with the exception of ELF shared libraries, that will be added only
3298when they are actually needed. This construct essentially enables
3299@option{--as-needed} option for all the files listed inside of it
3300and restores previous @option{--as-needed} resp. @option{--no-as-needed}
3301setting afterwards.
3302
252b5132
RH
3303@item OUTPUT(@var{filename})
3304@kindex OUTPUT(@var{filename})
b45619c0 3305@cindex output file name in linker script
252b5132
RH
3306The @code{OUTPUT} command names the output file. Using
3307@code{OUTPUT(@var{filename})} in the linker script is exactly like using
3308@samp{-o @var{filename}} on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command
3309Line Options}). If both are used, the command line option takes
3310precedence.
3311
3312You can use the @code{OUTPUT} command to define a default name for the
3313output file other than the usual default of @file{a.out}.
3314
3315@item SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3316@kindex SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3317@cindex library search path in linker script
3318@cindex archive search path in linker script
3319@cindex search path in linker script
3320The @code{SEARCH_DIR} command adds @var{path} to the list of paths where
ff5dcc92 3321@command{ld} looks for archive libraries. Using
252b5132
RH
3322@code{SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})} is exactly like using @samp{-L @var{path}}
3323on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both
3324are used, then the linker will search both paths. Paths specified using
3325the command line option are searched first.
3326
3327@item STARTUP(@var{filename})
3328@kindex STARTUP(@var{filename})
3329@cindex first input file
3330The @code{STARTUP} command is just like the @code{INPUT} command, except
3331that @var{filename} will become the first input file to be linked, as
3332though it were specified first on the command line. This may be useful
3333when using a system in which the entry point is always the start of the
3334first file.
3335@end table
3336
3337@ifclear SingleFormat
3338@node Format Commands
36f63dca 3339@subsection Commands Dealing with Object File Formats
252b5132
RH
3340A couple of linker script commands deal with object file formats.
3341
3342@table @code
3343@item OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3344@itemx OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{default}, @var{big}, @var{little})
3345@kindex OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3346@cindex output file format in linker script
3347The @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command names the BFD format to use for the
3348output file (@pxref{BFD}). Using @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})} is
024531e2 3349exactly like using @samp{--oformat @var{bfdname}} on the command line
252b5132
RH
3350(@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both are used, the command
3351line option takes precedence.
3352
3353You can use @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} with three arguments to use different
3354formats based on the @samp{-EB} and @samp{-EL} command line options.
3355This permits the linker script to set the output format based on the
3356desired endianness.
3357
3358If neither @samp{-EB} nor @samp{-EL} are used, then the output format
3359will be the first argument, @var{default}. If @samp{-EB} is used, the
3360output format will be the second argument, @var{big}. If @samp{-EL} is
3361used, the output format will be the third argument, @var{little}.
3362
3363For example, the default linker script for the MIPS ELF target uses this
3364command:
3365@smallexample
3366OUTPUT_FORMAT(elf32-bigmips, elf32-bigmips, elf32-littlemips)
3367@end smallexample
3368This says that the default format for the output file is
3369@samp{elf32-bigmips}, but if the user uses the @samp{-EL} command line
3370option, the output file will be created in the @samp{elf32-littlemips}
3371format.
3372
3373@item TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3374@kindex TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3375@cindex input file format in linker script
3376The @code{TARGET} command names the BFD format to use when reading input
3377files. It affects subsequent @code{INPUT} and @code{GROUP} commands.
3378This command is like using @samp{-b @var{bfdname}} on the command line
3379(@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If the @code{TARGET} command
3380is used but @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} is not, then the last @code{TARGET}
3381command is also used to set the format for the output file. @xref{BFD}.
3382@end table
3383@end ifclear
3384
4a93e180
NC
3385@node REGION_ALIAS
3386@subsection Assign alias names to memory regions
3387@kindex REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3388@cindex region alias
3389@cindex region names
3390
3391Alias names can be added to existing memory regions created with the
3392@ref{MEMORY} command. Each name corresponds to at most one memory region.
3393
3394@smallexample
3395REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3396@end smallexample
3397
3398The @code{REGION_ALIAS} function creates an alias name @var{alias} for the
3399memory region @var{region}. This allows a flexible mapping of output sections
3400to memory regions. An example follows.
3401
3402Suppose we have an application for embedded systems which come with various
3403memory storage devices. All have a general purpose, volatile memory @code{RAM}
3404that allows code execution or data storage. Some may have a read-only,
3405non-volatile memory @code{ROM} that allows code execution and read-only data
3406access. The last variant is a read-only, non-volatile memory @code{ROM2} with
3407read-only data access and no code execution capability. We have four output
3408sections:
3409
3410@itemize @bullet
3411@item
3412@code{.text} program code;
3413@item
3414@code{.rodata} read-only data;
3415@item
3416@code{.data} read-write initialized data;
3417@item
3418@code{.bss} read-write zero initialized data.
3419@end itemize
3420
3421The goal is to provide a linker command file that contains a system independent
3422part defining the output sections and a system dependent part mapping the
3423output sections to the memory regions available on the system. Our embedded
3424systems come with three different memory setups @code{A}, @code{B} and
3425@code{C}:
3426@multitable @columnfractions .25 .25 .25 .25
3427@item Section @tab Variant A @tab Variant B @tab Variant C
9d5777a3 3428@item .text @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM
4a93e180
NC
3429@item .rodata @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM2
3430@item .data @tab RAM @tab RAM/ROM @tab RAM/ROM2
3431@item .bss @tab RAM @tab RAM @tab RAM
3432@end multitable
3433The notation @code{RAM/ROM} or @code{RAM/ROM2} means that this section is
3434loaded into region @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} respectively. Please note that
3435the load address of the @code{.data} section starts in all three variants at
3436the end of the @code{.rodata} section.
3437
3438The base linker script that deals with the output sections follows. It
3439includes the system dependent @code{linkcmds.memory} file that describes the
3440memory layout:
3441@smallexample
3442INCLUDE linkcmds.memory
3443
3444SECTIONS
3445 @{
3446 .text :
3447 @{
3448 *(.text)
3449 @} > REGION_TEXT
3450 .rodata :
3451 @{
3452 *(.rodata)
3453 rodata_end = .;
3454 @} > REGION_RODATA
3455 .data : AT (rodata_end)
3456 @{
3457 data_start = .;
3458 *(.data)
3459 @} > REGION_DATA
3460 data_size = SIZEOF(.data);
3461 data_load_start = LOADADDR(.data);
3462 .bss :
3463 @{
3464 *(.bss)
3465 @} > REGION_BSS
3466 @}
3467@end smallexample
3468
3469Now we need three different @code{linkcmds.memory} files to define memory
3470regions and alias names. The content of @code{linkcmds.memory} for the three
3471variants @code{A}, @code{B} and @code{C}:
3472@table @code
3473@item A
3474Here everything goes into the @code{RAM}.
3475@smallexample
3476MEMORY
3477 @{
3478 RAM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 4M
3479 @}
3480
3481REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", RAM);
3482REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", RAM);
3483REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3484REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3485@end smallexample
3486@item B
3487Program code and read-only data go into the @code{ROM}. Read-write data goes
3488into the @code{RAM}. An image of the initialized data is loaded into the
3489@code{ROM} and will be copied during system start into the @code{RAM}.
3490@smallexample
3491MEMORY
3492 @{
3493 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 3M
3494 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3495 @}
3496
3497REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3498REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM);
3499REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3500REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3501@end smallexample
3502@item C
3503Program code goes into the @code{ROM}. Read-only data goes into the
3504@code{ROM2}. Read-write data goes into the @code{RAM}. An image of the
3505initialized data is loaded into the @code{ROM2} and will be copied during
3506system start into the @code{RAM}.
3507@smallexample
3508MEMORY
3509 @{
3510 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 2M
3511 ROM2 : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3512 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x20000000, LENGTH = 1M
3513 @}
3514
3515REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3516REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM2);
3517REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3518REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3519@end smallexample
3520@end table
3521
3522It is possible to write a common system initialization routine to copy the
3523@code{.data} section from @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} into the @code{RAM} if
3524necessary:
3525@smallexample
3526#include <string.h>
3527
3528extern char data_start [];
3529extern char data_size [];
3530extern char data_load_start [];
3531
3532void copy_data(void)
3533@{
3534 if (data_start != data_load_start)
3535 @{
3536 memcpy(data_start, data_load_start, (size_t) data_size);
3537 @}
3538@}
3539@end smallexample
3540
252b5132 3541@node Miscellaneous Commands
36f63dca 3542@subsection Other Linker Script Commands
252b5132
RH
3543There are a few other linker scripts commands.
3544
3545@table @code
3546@item ASSERT(@var{exp}, @var{message})
3547@kindex ASSERT
3548@cindex assertion in linker script
3549Ensure that @var{exp} is non-zero. If it is zero, then exit the linker
3550with an error code, and print @var{message}.
3551
fd1c4238
NC
3552Note that assertions are checked before the final stages of linking
3553take place. This means that expressions involving symbols PROVIDEd
3554inside section definitions will fail if the user has not set values
3555for those symbols. The only exception to this rule is PROVIDEd
3556symbols that just reference dot. Thus an assertion like this:
3557
3558@smallexample
3559 .stack :
3560 @{
3561 PROVIDE (__stack = .);
3562 PROVIDE (__stack_size = 0x100);
3563 ASSERT ((__stack > (_end + __stack_size)), "Error: No room left for the stack");
3564 @}
3565@end smallexample
3566
3567will fail if @code{__stack_size} is not defined elsewhere. Symbols
3568PROVIDEd outside of section definitions are evaluated earlier, so they
3569can be used inside ASSERTions. Thus:
3570
3571@smallexample
3572 PROVIDE (__stack_size = 0x100);
3573 .stack :
3574 @{
3575 PROVIDE (__stack = .);
3576 ASSERT ((__stack > (_end + __stack_size)), "Error: No room left for the stack");
3577 @}
3578@end smallexample
3579
3580will work.
3581
252b5132
RH
3582@item EXTERN(@var{symbol} @var{symbol} @dots{})
3583@kindex EXTERN
3584@cindex undefined symbol in linker script
3585Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
3586symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
3587modules from standard libraries. You may list several @var{symbol}s for
3588each @code{EXTERN}, and you may use @code{EXTERN} multiple times. This
3589command has the same effect as the @samp{-u} command-line option.
3590
3591@item FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3592@kindex FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3593@cindex common allocation in linker script
3594This command has the same effect as the @samp{-d} command-line option:
ff5dcc92 3595to make @command{ld} assign space to common symbols even if a relocatable
252b5132
RH
3596output file is specified (@samp{-r}).
3597
4818e05f
AM
3598@item INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3599@kindex INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3600@cindex common allocation in linker script
3601This command has the same effect as the @samp{--no-define-common}
3602command-line option: to make @code{ld} omit the assignment of addresses
3603to common symbols even for a non-relocatable output file.
3604
53d25da6
AM
3605@item INSERT [ AFTER | BEFORE ] @var{output_section}
3606@kindex INSERT
3607@cindex insert user script into default script
3608This command is typically used in a script specified by @samp{-T} to
3609augment the default @code{SECTIONS} with, for example, overlays. It
3610inserts all prior linker script statements after (or before)
3611@var{output_section}, and also causes @samp{-T} to not override the
3612default linker script. The exact insertion point is as for orphan
3613sections. @xref{Location Counter}. The insertion happens after the
3614linker has mapped input sections to output sections. Prior to the
3615insertion, since @samp{-T} scripts are parsed before the default
3616linker script, statements in the @samp{-T} script occur before the
3617default linker script statements in the internal linker representation
3618of the script. In particular, input section assignments will be made
3619to @samp{-T} output sections before those in the default script. Here
3620is an example of how a @samp{-T} script using @code{INSERT} might look:
3621
3622@smallexample
3623SECTIONS
3624@{
3625 OVERLAY :
3626 @{
3627 .ov1 @{ ov1*(.text) @}
3628 .ov2 @{ ov2*(.text) @}
3629 @}
3630@}
3631INSERT AFTER .text;
3632@end smallexample
3633
252b5132
RH
3634@item NOCROSSREFS(@var{section} @var{section} @dots{})
3635@kindex NOCROSSREFS(@var{sections})
3636@cindex cross references
ff5dcc92 3637This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
252b5132
RH
3638references among certain output sections.
3639
3640In certain types of programs, particularly on embedded systems when
3641using overlays, when one section is loaded into memory, another section
3642will not be. Any direct references between the two sections would be
3643errors. For example, it would be an error if code in one section called
3644a function defined in the other section.
3645
3646The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command takes a list of output section names. If
ff5dcc92 3647@command{ld} detects any cross references between the sections, it reports
252b5132
RH
3648an error and returns a non-zero exit status. Note that the
3649@code{NOCROSSREFS} command uses output section names, not input section
3650names.
3651
3652@ifclear SingleFormat
3653@item OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3654@kindex OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3655@cindex machine architecture
3656@cindex architecture
3657Specify a particular output machine architecture. The argument is one
3658of the names used by the BFD library (@pxref{BFD}). You can see the
3659architecture of an object file by using the @code{objdump} program with
3660the @samp{-f} option.
3661@end ifclear
01554a74
AM
3662
3663@item LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3664@kindex LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3665This command may be used to modify @command{ld} behavior. If
3666@var{string} is @code{"SANE_EXPR"} then absolute symbols and numbers
3667in a script are simply treated as numbers everywhere.
3668@xref{Expression Section}.
252b5132
RH
3669@end table
3670
3671@node Assignments
3672@section Assigning Values to Symbols
3673@cindex assignment in scripts
3674@cindex symbol definition, scripts
3675@cindex variables, defining
3676You may assign a value to a symbol in a linker script. This will define
73ae6183 3677the symbol and place it into the symbol table with a global scope.
252b5132
RH
3678
3679@menu
3680* Simple Assignments:: Simple Assignments
eb8476a6 3681* HIDDEN:: HIDDEN
252b5132 3682* PROVIDE:: PROVIDE
7af8e998 3683* PROVIDE_HIDDEN:: PROVIDE_HIDDEN
73ae6183 3684* Source Code Reference:: How to use a linker script defined symbol in source code
252b5132
RH
3685@end menu
3686
3687@node Simple Assignments
3688@subsection Simple Assignments
3689
3690You may assign to a symbol using any of the C assignment operators:
3691
3692@table @code
3693@item @var{symbol} = @var{expression} ;
3694@itemx @var{symbol} += @var{expression} ;
3695@itemx @var{symbol} -= @var{expression} ;
3696@itemx @var{symbol} *= @var{expression} ;
3697@itemx @var{symbol} /= @var{expression} ;
3698@itemx @var{symbol} <<= @var{expression} ;
3699@itemx @var{symbol} >>= @var{expression} ;
3700@itemx @var{symbol} &= @var{expression} ;
3701@itemx @var{symbol} |= @var{expression} ;
3702@end table
3703
3704The first case will define @var{symbol} to the value of
3705@var{expression}. In the other cases, @var{symbol} must already be
3706defined, and the value will be adjusted accordingly.
3707
3708The special symbol name @samp{.} indicates the location counter. You
b5666f2f 3709may only use this within a @code{SECTIONS} command. @xref{Location Counter}.
252b5132
RH
3710
3711The semicolon after @var{expression} is required.
3712
3713Expressions are defined below; see @ref{Expressions}.
3714
3715You may write symbol assignments as commands in their own right, or as
3716statements within a @code{SECTIONS} command, or as part of an output
3717section description in a @code{SECTIONS} command.
3718
3719The section of the symbol will be set from the section of the
3720expression; for more information, see @ref{Expression Section}.
3721
3722Here is an example showing the three different places that symbol
3723assignments may be used:
3724
3725@smallexample
3726floating_point = 0;
3727SECTIONS
3728@{
3729 .text :
3730 @{
3731 *(.text)
3732 _etext = .;
3733 @}
156e34dd 3734 _bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3;
252b5132
RH
3735 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3736@}
3737@end smallexample
3738@noindent
3739In this example, the symbol @samp{floating_point} will be defined as
3740zero. The symbol @samp{_etext} will be defined as the address following
3741the last @samp{.text} input section. The symbol @samp{_bdata} will be
3742defined as the address following the @samp{.text} output section aligned
3743upward to a 4 byte boundary.
3744
eb8476a6
MR
3745@node HIDDEN
3746@subsection HIDDEN
3747@cindex HIDDEN
3748For ELF targeted ports, define a symbol that will be hidden and won't be
3749exported. The syntax is @code{HIDDEN(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3750
3751Here is the example from @ref{Simple Assignments}, rewritten to use
3752@code{HIDDEN}:
3753
3754@smallexample
3755HIDDEN(floating_point = 0);
3756SECTIONS
3757@{
3758 .text :
3759 @{
3760 *(.text)
3761 HIDDEN(_etext = .);
3762 @}
3763 HIDDEN(_bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3);
3764 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3765@}
3766@end smallexample
3767@noindent
3768In this case none of the three symbols will be visible outside this module.
3769
252b5132
RH
3770@node PROVIDE
3771@subsection PROVIDE
3772@cindex PROVIDE
3773In some cases, it is desirable for a linker script to define a symbol
3774only if it is referenced and is not defined by any object included in
3775the link. For example, traditional linkers defined the symbol
3776@samp{etext}. However, ANSI C requires that the user be able to use
3777@samp{etext} as a function name without encountering an error. The
3778@code{PROVIDE} keyword may be used to define a symbol, such as
3779@samp{etext}, only if it is referenced but not defined. The syntax is
3780@code{PROVIDE(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3781
3782Here is an example of using @code{PROVIDE} to define @samp{etext}:
3783@smallexample
3784SECTIONS
3785@{
3786 .text :
3787 @{
3788 *(.text)
3789 _etext = .;
3790 PROVIDE(etext = .);
3791 @}
3792@}
3793@end smallexample
3794
3795In this example, if the program defines @samp{_etext} (with a leading
3796underscore), the linker will give a multiple definition error. If, on
3797the other hand, the program defines @samp{etext} (with no leading
3798underscore), the linker will silently use the definition in the program.
3799If the program references @samp{etext} but does not define it, the
3800linker will use the definition in the linker script.
3801
7af8e998
L
3802@node PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3803@subsection PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3804@cindex PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3805Similar to @code{PROVIDE}. For ELF targeted ports, the symbol will be
3806hidden and won't be exported.
3807
73ae6183
NC
3808@node Source Code Reference
3809@subsection Source Code Reference
3810
3811Accessing a linker script defined variable from source code is not
3812intuitive. In particular a linker script symbol is not equivalent to
3813a variable declaration in a high level language, it is instead a
3814symbol that does not have a value.
3815
3816Before going further, it is important to note that compilers often
3817transform names in the source code into different names when they are
3818stored in the symbol table. For example, Fortran compilers commonly
3819prepend or append an underscore, and C++ performs extensive @samp{name
3820mangling}. Therefore there might be a discrepancy between the name
3821of a variable as it is used in source code and the name of the same
3822variable as it is defined in a linker script. For example in C a
3823linker script variable might be referred to as:
3824
3825@smallexample
3826 extern int foo;
3827@end smallexample
3828
3829But in the linker script it might be defined as:
3830
3831@smallexample
3832 _foo = 1000;
3833@end smallexample
3834
3835In the remaining examples however it is assumed that no name
3836transformation has taken place.
3837
3838When a symbol is declared in a high level language such as C, two
3839things happen. The first is that the compiler reserves enough space
3840in the program's memory to hold the @emph{value} of the symbol. The
3841second is that the compiler creates an entry in the program's symbol
3842table which holds the symbol's @emph{address}. ie the symbol table
3843contains the address of the block of memory holding the symbol's
3844value. So for example the following C declaration, at file scope:
3845
3846@smallexample
3847 int foo = 1000;
3848@end smallexample
3849
10bf6894 3850creates an entry called @samp{foo} in the symbol table. This entry
73ae6183
NC
3851holds the address of an @samp{int} sized block of memory where the
3852number 1000 is initially stored.
3853
3854When a program references a symbol the compiler generates code that
3855first accesses the symbol table to find the address of the symbol's
3856memory block and then code to read the value from that memory block.
3857So:
3858
3859@smallexample
3860 foo = 1;
3861@end smallexample
3862
3863looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets the address
3864associated with this symbol and then writes the value 1 into that
3865address. Whereas:
3866
3867@smallexample
3868 int * a = & foo;
3869@end smallexample
3870
10bf6894 3871looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets its address
73ae6183
NC
3872and then copies this address into the block of memory associated with
3873the variable @samp{a}.
3874
3875Linker scripts symbol declarations, by contrast, create an entry in
3876the symbol table but do not assign any memory to them. Thus they are
3877an address without a value. So for example the linker script definition:
3878
3879@smallexample
3880 foo = 1000;
3881@end smallexample
3882
3883creates an entry in the symbol table called @samp{foo} which holds
3884the address of memory location 1000, but nothing special is stored at
3885address 1000. This means that you cannot access the @emph{value} of a
3886linker script defined symbol - it has no value - all you can do is
3887access the @emph{address} of a linker script defined symbol.
3888
3889Hence when you are using a linker script defined symbol in source code
3890you should always take the address of the symbol, and never attempt to
3891use its value. For example suppose you want to copy the contents of a
3892section of memory called .ROM into a section called .FLASH and the
3893linker script contains these declarations:
3894
3895@smallexample
3896@group
3897 start_of_ROM = .ROM;
a5e406b5 3898 end_of_ROM = .ROM + sizeof (.ROM);
73ae6183
NC
3899 start_of_FLASH = .FLASH;
3900@end group
3901@end smallexample
3902
3903Then the C source code to perform the copy would be:
3904
3905@smallexample
3906@group
3907 extern char start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM, start_of_FLASH;
c0065db7 3908
73ae6183
NC
3909 memcpy (& start_of_FLASH, & start_of_ROM, & end_of_ROM - & start_of_ROM);
3910@end group
3911@end smallexample
3912
3913Note the use of the @samp{&} operators. These are correct.
5707d2ad
NC
3914Alternatively the symbols can be treated as the names of vectors or
3915arrays and then the code will again work as expected:
3916
3917@smallexample
3918@group
3919 extern char start_of_ROM[], end_of_ROM[], start_of_FLASH[];
3920
3921 memcpy (start_of_FLASH, start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM - start_of_ROM);
3922@end group
3923@end smallexample
3924
3925Note how using this method does not require the use of @samp{&}
3926operators.
73ae6183 3927
252b5132 3928@node SECTIONS
36f63dca 3929@section SECTIONS Command
252b5132
RH
3930@kindex SECTIONS
3931The @code{SECTIONS} command tells the linker how to map input sections
3932into output sections, and how to place the output sections in memory.
3933
3934The format of the @code{SECTIONS} command is:
3935@smallexample
3936SECTIONS
3937@{
3938 @var{sections-command}
3939 @var{sections-command}
3940 @dots{}
3941@}
3942@end smallexample
3943
3944Each @var{sections-command} may of be one of the following:
3945
3946@itemize @bullet
3947@item
3948an @code{ENTRY} command (@pxref{Entry Point,,Entry command})
3949@item
3950a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
3951@item
3952an output section description
3953@item
3954an overlay description
3955@end itemize
3956
3957The @code{ENTRY} command and symbol assignments are permitted inside the
3958@code{SECTIONS} command for convenience in using the location counter in
3959those commands. This can also make the linker script easier to
3960understand because you can use those commands at meaningful points in
3961the layout of the output file.
3962
3963Output section descriptions and overlay descriptions are described
3964below.
3965
3966If you do not use a @code{SECTIONS} command in your linker script, the
3967linker will place each input section into an identically named output
3968section in the order that the sections are first encountered in the
3969input files. If all input sections are present in the first file, for
3970example, the order of sections in the output file will match the order
3971in the first input file. The first section will be at address zero.
3972
3973@menu
3974* Output Section Description:: Output section description
3975* Output Section Name:: Output section name
3976* Output Section Address:: Output section address
3977* Input Section:: Input section description
3978* Output Section Data:: Output section data
3979* Output Section Keywords:: Output section keywords
3980* Output Section Discarding:: Output section discarding
3981* Output Section Attributes:: Output section attributes
3982* Overlay Description:: Overlay description
3983@end menu
3984
3985@node Output Section Description
36f63dca 3986@subsection Output Section Description
252b5132
RH
3987The full description of an output section looks like this:
3988@smallexample
a1ab1d2a 3989@group
7e7d5768 3990@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
0c71d759 3991 [AT(@var{lma})]
1eec346e 3992 [ALIGN(@var{section_align}) | ALIGN_WITH_INPUT]
0c71d759
NC
3993 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
3994 [@var{constraint}]
252b5132
RH
3995 @{
3996 @var{output-section-command}
3997 @var{output-section-command}
3998 @dots{}
abc9061b 3999 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}] [,]
252b5132
RH
4000@end group
4001@end smallexample
4002
4003Most output sections do not use most of the optional section attributes.
4004
4005The whitespace around @var{section} is required, so that the section
4006name is unambiguous. The colon and the curly braces are also required.
abc9061b
CC
4007The comma at the end may be required if a @var{fillexp} is used and
4008the next @var{sections-command} looks like a continuation of the expression.
252b5132
RH
4009The line breaks and other white space are optional.
4010
4011Each @var{output-section-command} may be one of the following:
4012
4013@itemize @bullet
4014@item
4015a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
4016@item
4017an input section description (@pxref{Input Section})
4018@item
4019data values to include directly (@pxref{Output Section Data})
4020@item
4021a special output section keyword (@pxref{Output Section Keywords})
4022@end itemize
4023
4024@node Output Section Name
36f63dca 4025@subsection Output Section Name
252b5132
RH
4026@cindex name, section
4027@cindex section name
4028The name of the output section is @var{section}. @var{section} must
4029meet the constraints of your output format. In formats which only
4030support a limited number of sections, such as @code{a.out}, the name
4031must be one of the names supported by the format (@code{a.out}, for
4032example, allows only @samp{.text}, @samp{.data} or @samp{.bss}). If the
4033output format supports any number of sections, but with numbers and not
4034names (as is the case for Oasys), the name should be supplied as a
4035quoted numeric string. A section name may consist of any sequence of
4036characters, but a name which contains any unusual characters such as
4037commas must be quoted.
4038
4039The output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} is special; @ref{Output Section
4040Discarding}.
4041
4042@node Output Section Address
2a16d82a 4043@subsection Output Section Address
252b5132
RH
4044@cindex address, section
4045@cindex section address
4046The @var{address} is an expression for the VMA (the virtual memory
ea5cae92
NC
4047address) of the output section. This address is optional, but if it
4048is provided then the output address will be set exactly as specified.
4049
4050If the output address is not specified then one will be chosen for the
4051section, based on the heuristic below. This address will be adjusted
4052to fit the alignment requirement of the output section. The
4053alignment requirement is the strictest alignment of any input section
4054contained within the output section.
4055
4056The output section address heuristic is as follows:
4057
4058@itemize @bullet
4059@item
4060If an output memory @var{region} is set for the section then it
4061is added to this region and its address will be the next free address
4062in that region.
4063
4064@item
4065If the MEMORY command has been used to create a list of memory
4066regions then the first region which has attributes compatible with the
4067section is selected to contain it. The section's output address will
4068be the next free address in that region; @ref{MEMORY}.
4069
4070@item
4071If no memory regions were specified, or none match the section then
4072the output address will be based on the current value of the location
4073counter.
4074@end itemize
4075
4076@noindent
4077For example:
4078
252b5132
RH
4079@smallexample
4080.text . : @{ *(.text) @}
4081@end smallexample
ea5cae92 4082
252b5132
RH
4083@noindent
4084and
ea5cae92 4085
252b5132
RH
4086@smallexample
4087.text : @{ *(.text) @}
4088@end smallexample
ea5cae92 4089
252b5132
RH
4090@noindent
4091are subtly different. The first will set the address of the
4092@samp{.text} output section to the current value of the location
4093counter. The second will set it to the current value of the location
ea5cae92
NC
4094counter aligned to the strictest alignment of any of the @samp{.text}
4095input sections.
252b5132
RH
4096
4097The @var{address} may be an arbitrary expression; @ref{Expressions}.
4098For example, if you want to align the section on a 0x10 byte boundary,
4099so that the lowest four bits of the section address are zero, you could
4100do something like this:
4101@smallexample
4102.text ALIGN(0x10) : @{ *(.text) @}
4103@end smallexample
4104@noindent
4105This works because @code{ALIGN} returns the current location counter
4106aligned upward to the specified value.
4107
4108Specifying @var{address} for a section will change the value of the
6ce340f1
NC
4109location counter, provided that the section is non-empty. (Empty
4110sections are ignored).
252b5132
RH
4111
4112@node Input Section
36f63dca 4113@subsection Input Section Description
252b5132
RH
4114@cindex input sections
4115@cindex mapping input sections to output sections
4116The most common output section command is an input section description.
4117
4118The input section description is the most basic linker script operation.
4119You use output sections to tell the linker how to lay out your program
4120in memory. You use input section descriptions to tell the linker how to
4121map the input files into your memory layout.
4122
4123@menu
4124* Input Section Basics:: Input section basics
4125* Input Section Wildcards:: Input section wildcard patterns
4126* Input Section Common:: Input section for common symbols
4127* Input Section Keep:: Input section and garbage collection
4128* Input Section Example:: Input section example
4129@end menu
4130
4131@node Input Section Basics
36f63dca 4132@subsubsection Input Section Basics
252b5132
RH
4133@cindex input section basics
4134An input section description consists of a file name optionally followed
4135by a list of section names in parentheses.
4136
4137The file name and the section name may be wildcard patterns, which we
4138describe further below (@pxref{Input Section Wildcards}).
4139
4140The most common input section description is to include all input
4141sections with a particular name in the output section. For example, to
4142include all input @samp{.text} sections, you would write:
4143@smallexample
4144*(.text)
4145@end smallexample
4146@noindent
18625d54
CM
4147Here the @samp{*} is a wildcard which matches any file name. To exclude a list
4148of files from matching the file name wildcard, EXCLUDE_FILE may be used to
4149match all files except the ones specified in the EXCLUDE_FILE list. For
4150example:
252b5132 4151@smallexample
b4346c09 4152*(EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) .ctors)
252b5132 4153@end smallexample
765b7cbe
JB
4154will cause all .ctors sections from all files except @file{crtend.o} and
4155@file{otherfile.o} to be included.
252b5132
RH
4156
4157There are two ways to include more than one section:
4158@smallexample
4159*(.text .rdata)
4160*(.text) *(.rdata)
4161@end smallexample
4162@noindent
4163The difference between these is the order in which the @samp{.text} and
4164@samp{.rdata} input sections will appear in the output section. In the
b6bf44ba
AM
4165first example, they will be intermingled, appearing in the same order as
4166they are found in the linker input. In the second example, all
252b5132
RH
4167@samp{.text} input sections will appear first, followed by all
4168@samp{.rdata} input sections.
4169
4170You can specify a file name to include sections from a particular file.
4171You would do this if one or more of your files contain special data that
4172needs to be at a particular location in memory. For example:
4173@smallexample
4174data.o(.data)
4175@end smallexample
4176
ae17ab41
CM
4177To refine the sections that are included based on the section flags
4178of an input section, INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS may be used.
4179
4180Here is a simple example for using Section header flags for ELF sections:
4181
4182@smallexample
4183@group
4184SECTIONS @{
4185 .text : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (SHF_MERGE & SHF_STRINGS) *(.text) @}
4186 .text2 : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (!SHF_WRITE) *(.text) @}
4187@}
4188@end group
4189@end smallexample
4190
4191In this example, the output section @samp{.text} will be comprised of any
4192input section matching the name *(.text) whose section header flags
4193@code{SHF_MERGE} and @code{SHF_STRINGS} are set. The output section
4194@samp{.text2} will be comprised of any input section matching the name *(.text)
4195whose section header flag @code{SHF_WRITE} is clear.
4196
967928e9
AM
4197You can also specify files within archives by writing a pattern
4198matching the archive, a colon, then the pattern matching the file,
4199with no whitespace around the colon.
4200
4201@table @samp
4202@item archive:file
4203matches file within archive
4204@item archive:
4205matches the whole archive
4206@item :file
4207matches file but not one in an archive
4208@end table
4209
4210Either one or both of @samp{archive} and @samp{file} can contain shell
4211wildcards. On DOS based file systems, the linker will assume that a
4212single letter followed by a colon is a drive specifier, so
4213@samp{c:myfile.o} is a simple file specification, not @samp{myfile.o}
4214within an archive called @samp{c}. @samp{archive:file} filespecs may
4215also be used within an @code{EXCLUDE_FILE} list, but may not appear in
4216other linker script contexts. For instance, you cannot extract a file
4217from an archive by using @samp{archive:file} in an @code{INPUT}
4218command.
4219
252b5132
RH
4220If you use a file name without a list of sections, then all sections in
4221the input file will be included in the output section. This is not
4222commonly done, but it may by useful on occasion. For example:
4223@smallexample
4224data.o
4225@end smallexample
4226
967928e9
AM
4227When you use a file name which is not an @samp{archive:file} specifier
4228and does not contain any wild card
252b5132
RH
4229characters, the linker will first see if you also specified the file
4230name on the linker command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. If you
4231did not, the linker will attempt to open the file as an input file, as
4232though it appeared on the command line. Note that this differs from an
4233@code{INPUT} command, because the linker will not search for the file in
4234the archive search path.
4235
4236@node Input Section Wildcards
36f63dca 4237@subsubsection Input Section Wildcard Patterns
252b5132
RH
4238@cindex input section wildcards
4239@cindex wildcard file name patterns
4240@cindex file name wildcard patterns
4241@cindex section name wildcard patterns
4242In an input section description, either the file name or the section
4243name or both may be wildcard patterns.
4244
4245The file name of @samp{*} seen in many examples is a simple wildcard
4246pattern for the file name.
4247
4248The wildcard patterns are like those used by the Unix shell.
4249
4250@table @samp
4251@item *
4252matches any number of characters
4253@item ?
4254matches any single character
4255@item [@var{chars}]
4256matches a single instance of any of the @var{chars}; the @samp{-}
4257character may be used to specify a range of characters, as in
4258@samp{[a-z]} to match any lower case letter
4259@item \
4260quotes the following character
4261@end table
4262
4263When a file name is matched with a wildcard, the wildcard characters
4264will not match a @samp{/} character (used to separate directory names on
4265Unix). A pattern consisting of a single @samp{*} character is an
4266exception; it will always match any file name, whether it contains a
4267@samp{/} or not. In a section name, the wildcard characters will match
4268a @samp{/} character.
4269
4270File name wildcard patterns only match files which are explicitly
4271specified on the command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. The linker
4272does not search directories to expand wildcards.
4273
4274If a file name matches more than one wildcard pattern, or if a file name
4275appears explicitly and is also matched by a wildcard pattern, the linker
4276will use the first match in the linker script. For example, this
4277sequence of input section descriptions is probably in error, because the
4278@file{data.o} rule will not be used:
4279@smallexample
4280.data : @{ *(.data) @}
4281.data1 : @{ data.o(.data) @}
4282@end smallexample
4283
bcaa7b3e 4284@cindex SORT_BY_NAME
252b5132
RH
4285Normally, the linker will place files and sections matched by wildcards
4286in the order in which they are seen during the link. You can change
bcaa7b3e
L
4287this by using the @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword, which appears before a wildcard
4288pattern in parentheses (e.g., @code{SORT_BY_NAME(.text*)}). When the
4289@code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword is used, the linker will sort the files or sections
252b5132
RH
4290into ascending order by name before placing them in the output file.
4291
bcaa7b3e
L
4292@cindex SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT
4293@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
4294difference is @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} will sort sections into
1ae5c3ae 4295descending order by alignment before placing them in the output file.
ee83b8a6
NC
4296Larger alignments are placed before smaller alignments in order to
4297reduce the amount of padding necessary.
bcaa7b3e 4298
02ecc8e9
L
4299@cindex SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY
4300@code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
4301difference is @code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} will sort sections into
4302ascending order by numerical value of the GCC init_priority attribute
4303encoded in the section name before placing them in the output file.
4304
bcaa7b3e
L
4305@cindex SORT
4306@code{SORT} is an alias for @code{SORT_BY_NAME}.
4307
4308When there are nested section sorting commands in linker script, there
4309can be at most 1 level of nesting for section sorting commands.
4310
4311@enumerate
4312@item
4313@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
1ae5c3ae 4314It will sort the input sections by name first, then by alignment if two
bcaa7b3e
L
4315sections have the same name.
4316@item
4317@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
1ae5c3ae 4318It will sort the input sections by alignment first, then by name if two
bcaa7b3e
L
4319sections have the same alignment.
4320@item
c0065db7 4321@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)) is
bcaa7b3e
L
4322treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern).
4323@item
4324@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern))
4325is treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern).
4326@item
4327All other nested section sorting commands are invalid.
4328@end enumerate
4329
4330When both command line section sorting option and linker script
4331section sorting command are used, section sorting command always
4332takes precedence over the command line option.
4333
4334If the section sorting command in linker script isn't nested, the
4335command line option will make the section sorting command to be
4336treated as nested sorting command.
4337
4338@enumerate
4339@item
4340@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern ) with
4341@option{--sort-sections alignment} is equivalent to
4342@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
4343@item
4344@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern) with
4345@option{--sort-section name} is equivalent to
4346@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
4347@end enumerate
4348
4349If the section sorting command in linker script is nested, the
4350command line option will be ignored.
4351
eda680f8
L
4352@cindex SORT_NONE
4353@code{SORT_NONE} disables section sorting by ignoring the command line
4354section sorting option.
4355
252b5132
RH
4356If you ever get confused about where input sections are going, use the
4357@samp{-M} linker option to generate a map file. The map file shows
4358precisely how input sections are mapped to output sections.
4359
4360This example shows how wildcard patterns might be used to partition
4361files. This linker script directs the linker to place all @samp{.text}
4362sections in @samp{.text} and all @samp{.bss} sections in @samp{.bss}.
4363The linker will place the @samp{.data} section from all files beginning
4364with an upper case character in @samp{.DATA}; for all other files, the
4365linker will place the @samp{.data} section in @samp{.data}.
4366@smallexample
4367@group
4368SECTIONS @{
4369 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
4370 .DATA : @{ [A-Z]*(.data) @}
4371 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4372 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
4373@}
4374@end group
4375@end smallexample
4376
4377@node Input Section Common
36f63dca 4378@subsubsection Input Section for Common Symbols
252b5132
RH
4379@cindex common symbol placement
4380@cindex uninitialized data placement
4381A special notation is needed for common symbols, because in many object
4382file formats common symbols do not have a particular input section. The
4383linker treats common symbols as though they are in an input section
4384named @samp{COMMON}.
4385
4386You may use file names with the @samp{COMMON} section just as with any
4387other input sections. You can use this to place common symbols from a
4388particular input file in one section while common symbols from other
4389input files are placed in another section.
4390
4391In most cases, common symbols in input files will be placed in the
4392@samp{.bss} section in the output file. For example:
4393@smallexample
4394.bss @{ *(.bss) *(COMMON) @}
4395@end smallexample
4396
4397@cindex scommon section
4398@cindex small common symbols
4399Some object file formats have more than one type of common symbol. For
4400example, the MIPS ELF object file format distinguishes standard common
4401symbols and small common symbols. In this case, the linker will use a
4402different special section name for other types of common symbols. In
4403the case of MIPS ELF, the linker uses @samp{COMMON} for standard common
4404symbols and @samp{.scommon} for small common symbols. This permits you
4405to map the different types of common symbols into memory at different
4406locations.
4407
4408@cindex [COMMON]
4409You will sometimes see @samp{[COMMON]} in old linker scripts. This
4410notation is now considered obsolete. It is equivalent to
4411@samp{*(COMMON)}.
4412
4413@node Input Section Keep
36f63dca 4414@subsubsection Input Section and Garbage Collection
252b5132
RH
4415@cindex KEEP
4416@cindex garbage collection
4417When link-time garbage collection is in use (@samp{--gc-sections}),
a1ab1d2a 4418it is often useful to mark sections that should not be eliminated.
252b5132
RH
4419This is accomplished by surrounding an input section's wildcard entry
4420with @code{KEEP()}, as in @code{KEEP(*(.init))} or
bcaa7b3e 4421@code{KEEP(SORT_BY_NAME(*)(.ctors))}.
252b5132
RH
4422
4423@node Input Section Example
36f63dca 4424@subsubsection Input Section Example
252b5132
RH
4425The following example is a complete linker script. It tells the linker
4426to read all of the sections from file @file{all.o} and place them at the
4427start of output section @samp{outputa} which starts at location
4428@samp{0x10000}. All of section @samp{.input1} from file @file{foo.o}
4429follows immediately, in the same output section. All of section
4430@samp{.input2} from @file{foo.o} goes into output section
4431@samp{outputb}, followed by section @samp{.input1} from @file{foo1.o}.
4432All of the remaining @samp{.input1} and @samp{.input2} sections from any
4433files are written to output section @samp{outputc}.
4434
4435@smallexample
4436@group
4437SECTIONS @{
4438 outputa 0x10000 :
4439 @{
4440 all.o
4441 foo.o (.input1)
4442 @}
36f63dca
NC
4443@end group
4444@group
252b5132
RH
4445 outputb :
4446 @{
4447 foo.o (.input2)
4448 foo1.o (.input1)
4449 @}
36f63dca
NC
4450@end group
4451@group
252b5132
RH
4452 outputc :
4453 @{
4454 *(.input1)
4455 *(.input2)
4456 @}
4457@}
4458@end group
a1ab1d2a 4459@end smallexample
252b5132
RH
4460
4461@node Output Section Data
36f63dca 4462@subsection Output Section Data
252b5132
RH
4463@cindex data
4464@cindex section data
4465@cindex output section data
4466@kindex BYTE(@var{expression})
4467@kindex SHORT(@var{expression})
4468@kindex LONG(@var{expression})
4469@kindex QUAD(@var{expression})
4470@kindex SQUAD(@var{expression})
4471You can include explicit bytes of data in an output section by using
4472@code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, @code{QUAD}, or @code{SQUAD} as
4473an output section command. Each keyword is followed by an expression in
4474parentheses providing the value to store (@pxref{Expressions}). The
4475value of the expression is stored at the current value of the location
4476counter.
4477
4478The @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, and @code{QUAD} commands
4479store one, two, four, and eight bytes (respectively). After storing the
4480bytes, the location counter is incremented by the number of bytes
4481stored.
4482
4483For example, this will store the byte 1 followed by the four byte value
4484of the symbol @samp{addr}:
4485@smallexample
4486BYTE(1)
4487LONG(addr)
4488@end smallexample
4489
4490When using a 64 bit host or target, @code{QUAD} and @code{SQUAD} are the
4491same; they both store an 8 byte, or 64 bit, value. When both host and
4492target are 32 bits, an expression is computed as 32 bits. In this case
4493@code{QUAD} stores a 32 bit value zero extended to 64 bits, and
4494@code{SQUAD} stores a 32 bit value sign extended to 64 bits.
4495
4496If the object file format of the output file has an explicit endianness,
4497which is the normal case, the value will be stored in that endianness.
4498When the object file format does not have an explicit endianness, as is
4499true of, for example, S-records, the value will be stored in the
4500endianness of the first input object file.
4501
36f63dca 4502Note---these commands only work inside a section description and not
2b5fc1f5
NC
4503between them, so the following will produce an error from the linker:
4504@smallexample
4505SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) @}@ LONG(1) .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4506@end smallexample
4507whereas this will work:
4508@smallexample
4509SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) ; LONG(1) @}@ .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4510@end smallexample
4511
252b5132
RH
4512@kindex FILL(@var{expression})
4513@cindex holes, filling
4514@cindex unspecified memory
4515You may use the @code{FILL} command to set the fill pattern for the
4516current section. It is followed by an expression in parentheses. Any
4517otherwise unspecified regions of memory within the section (for example,
4518gaps left due to the required alignment of input sections) are filled
a139d329 4519with the value of the expression, repeated as
252b5132
RH
4520necessary. A @code{FILL} statement covers memory locations after the
4521point at which it occurs in the section definition; by including more
4522than one @code{FILL} statement, you can have different fill patterns in
4523different parts of an output section.
4524
4525This example shows how to fill unspecified regions of memory with the
563e308f 4526value @samp{0x90}:
252b5132 4527@smallexample
563e308f 4528FILL(0x90909090)
252b5132
RH
4529@end smallexample
4530
4531The @code{FILL} command is similar to the @samp{=@var{fillexp}} output
9673c93c 4532section attribute, but it only affects the
252b5132
RH
4533part of the section following the @code{FILL} command, rather than the
4534entire section. If both are used, the @code{FILL} command takes
9673c93c 4535precedence. @xref{Output Section Fill}, for details on the fill
a139d329 4536expression.
252b5132
RH
4537
4538@node Output Section Keywords
36f63dca 4539@subsection Output Section Keywords
252b5132
RH
4540There are a couple of keywords which can appear as output section
4541commands.
4542
4543@table @code
4544@kindex CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4545@cindex input filename symbols
4546@cindex filename symbols
4547@item CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4548The command tells the linker to create a symbol for each input file.
4549The name of each symbol will be the name of the corresponding input
4550file. The section of each symbol will be the output section in which
4551the @code{CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS} command appears.
4552
4553This is conventional for the a.out object file format. It is not
4554normally used for any other object file format.
4555
4556@kindex CONSTRUCTORS
4557@cindex C++ constructors, arranging in link
4558@cindex constructors, arranging in link
4559@item CONSTRUCTORS
4560When linking using the a.out object file format, the linker uses an
4561unusual set construct to support C++ global constructors and
4562destructors. When linking object file formats which do not support
4563arbitrary sections, such as ECOFF and XCOFF, the linker will
4564automatically recognize C++ global constructors and destructors by name.
4565For these object file formats, the @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command tells the
4566linker to place constructor information in the output section where the
4567@code{CONSTRUCTORS} command appears. The @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command is
4568ignored for other object file formats.
4569
4570The symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_LIST__}} marks the start of the global
7e69709c
AM
4571constructors, and the symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_END__}} marks the end.
4572Similarly, @w{@code{__DTOR_LIST__}} and @w{@code{__DTOR_END__}} mark
4573the start and end of the global destructors. The
252b5132
RH
4574first word in the list is the number of entries, followed by the address
4575of each constructor or destructor, followed by a zero word. The
4576compiler must arrange to actually run the code. For these object file
4577formats @sc{gnu} C++ normally calls constructors from a subroutine
4578@code{__main}; a call to @code{__main} is automatically inserted into
4579the startup code for @code{main}. @sc{gnu} C++ normally runs
4580destructors either by using @code{atexit}, or directly from the function
4581@code{exit}.
4582
4583For object file formats such as @code{COFF} or @code{ELF} which support
4584arbitrary section names, @sc{gnu} C++ will normally arrange to put the
4585addresses of global constructors and destructors into the @code{.ctors}
4586and @code{.dtors} sections. Placing the following sequence into your
4587linker script will build the sort of table which the @sc{gnu} C++
4588runtime code expects to see.
4589
4590@smallexample
4591 __CTOR_LIST__ = .;
4592 LONG((__CTOR_END__ - __CTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4593 *(.ctors)
4594 LONG(0)
4595 __CTOR_END__ = .;
4596 __DTOR_LIST__ = .;
4597 LONG((__DTOR_END__ - __DTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4598 *(.dtors)
4599 LONG(0)
4600 __DTOR_END__ = .;
4601@end smallexample
4602
4603If you are using the @sc{gnu} C++ support for initialization priority,
4604which provides some control over the order in which global constructors
4605are run, you must sort the constructors at link time to ensure that they
4606are executed in the correct order. When using the @code{CONSTRUCTORS}
bcaa7b3e
L
4607command, use @samp{SORT_BY_NAME(CONSTRUCTORS)} instead. When using the
4608@code{.ctors} and @code{.dtors} sections, use @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.ctors))} and
4609@samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.dtors))} instead of just @samp{*(.ctors)} and
252b5132
RH
4610@samp{*(.dtors)}.
4611
4612Normally the compiler and linker will handle these issues automatically,
4613and you will not need to concern yourself with them. However, you may
4614need to consider this if you are using C++ and writing your own linker
4615scripts.
4616
4617@end table
4618
4619@node Output Section Discarding
36f63dca 4620@subsection Output Section Discarding
252b5132
RH
4621@cindex discarding sections
4622@cindex sections, discarding
4623@cindex removing sections
2edab91c
AM
4624The linker will not normally create output sections with no contents.
4625This is for convenience when referring to input sections that may or
4626may not be present in any of the input files. For example:
252b5132 4627@smallexample
49c13adb 4628.foo : @{ *(.foo) @}
252b5132
RH
4629@end smallexample
4630@noindent
4631will only create a @samp{.foo} section in the output file if there is a
74541ad4
AM
4632@samp{.foo} section in at least one input file, and if the input
4633sections are not all empty. Other link script directives that allocate
2edab91c
AM
4634space in an output section will also create the output section. So
4635too will assignments to dot even if the assignment does not create
4636space, except for @samp{. = 0}, @samp{. = . + 0}, @samp{. = sym},
4637@samp{. = . + sym} and @samp{. = ALIGN (. != 0, expr, 1)} when
4638@samp{sym} is an absolute symbol of value 0 defined in the script.
4639This allows you to force output of an empty section with @samp{. = .}.
74541ad4 4640
a0976ea4 4641The linker will ignore address assignments (@pxref{Output Section Address})
74541ad4
AM
4642on discarded output sections, except when the linker script defines
4643symbols in the output section. In that case the linker will obey
a0976ea4
AM
4644the address assignments, possibly advancing dot even though the
4645section is discarded.
252b5132
RH
4646
4647@cindex /DISCARD/
4648The special output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} may be used to discard
4649input sections. Any input sections which are assigned to an output
4650section named @samp{/DISCARD/} are not included in the output file.
4651
4652@node Output Section Attributes
36f63dca 4653@subsection Output Section Attributes
252b5132
RH
4654@cindex output section attributes
4655We showed above that the full description of an output section looked
4656like this:
0c71d759 4657
252b5132 4658@smallexample
a1ab1d2a 4659@group
7e7d5768 4660@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
0c71d759
NC
4661 [AT(@var{lma})]
4662 [ALIGN(@var{section_align})]
4663 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
4664 [@var{constraint}]
252b5132
RH
4665 @{
4666 @var{output-section-command}
4667 @var{output-section-command}
4668 @dots{}
562d3460 4669 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
252b5132
RH
4670@end group
4671@end smallexample
0c71d759 4672
252b5132
RH
4673We've already described @var{section}, @var{address}, and
4674@var{output-section-command}. In this section we will describe the
4675remaining section attributes.
4676
a1ab1d2a 4677@menu
252b5132
RH
4678* Output Section Type:: Output section type
4679* Output Section LMA:: Output section LMA
bbf115d3 4680* Forced Output Alignment:: Forced Output Alignment
7e7d5768 4681* Forced Input Alignment:: Forced Input Alignment
0c71d759 4682* Output Section Constraint:: Output section constraint
252b5132
RH
4683* Output Section Region:: Output section region
4684* Output Section Phdr:: Output section phdr
4685* Output Section Fill:: Output section fill
4686@end menu
4687
4688@node Output Section Type
36f63dca 4689@subsubsection Output Section Type
252b5132
RH
4690Each output section may have a type. The type is a keyword in
4691parentheses. The following types are defined:
4692
4693@table @code
4694@item NOLOAD
4695The section should be marked as not loadable, so that it will not be
4696loaded into memory when the program is run.
4697@item DSECT
4698@itemx COPY
4699@itemx INFO
4700@itemx OVERLAY
4701These type names are supported for backward compatibility, and are
4702rarely used. They all have the same effect: the section should be
4703marked as not allocatable, so that no memory is allocated for the
4704section when the program is run.
4705@end table
4706
4707@kindex NOLOAD
4708@cindex prevent unnecessary loading
4709@cindex loading, preventing
4710The linker normally sets the attributes of an output section based on
4711the input sections which map into it. You can override this by using
4712the section type. For example, in the script sample below, the
4713@samp{ROM} section is addressed at memory location @samp{0} and does not
2e76e85a 4714need to be loaded when the program is run.
252b5132
RH
4715@smallexample
4716@group
4717SECTIONS @{
4718 ROM 0 (NOLOAD) : @{ @dots{} @}
4719 @dots{}
4720@}
4721@end group
4722@end smallexample
4723
4724@node Output Section LMA
36f63dca 4725@subsubsection Output Section LMA
562d3460 4726@kindex AT>@var{lma_region}
252b5132
RH
4727@kindex AT(@var{lma})
4728@cindex load address
4729@cindex section load address
4730Every section has a virtual address (VMA) and a load address (LMA); see
ea5cae92
NC
4731@ref{Basic Script Concepts}. The virtual address is specified by the
4732@pxref{Output Section Address} described earlier. The load address is
4733specified by the @code{AT} or @code{AT>} keywords. Specifying a load
4734address is optional.
6bdafbeb 4735
ea5cae92
NC
4736The @code{AT} keyword takes an expression as an argument. This
4737specifies the exact load address of the section. The @code{AT>} keyword
4738takes the name of a memory region as an argument. @xref{MEMORY}. The
4739load address of the section is set to the next free address in the
4740region, aligned to the section's alignment requirements.
dc0b6aa0
AM
4741
4742If neither @code{AT} nor @code{AT>} is specified for an allocatable
ea5cae92
NC
4743section, the linker will use the following heuristic to determine the
4744load address:
4745
4746@itemize @bullet
4747@item
4748If the section has a specific VMA address, then this is used as
4749the LMA address as well.
4750
4751@item
4752If the section is not allocatable then its LMA is set to its VMA.
4753
4754@item
4755Otherwise if a memory region can be found that is compatible
4756with the current section, and this region contains at least one
4757section, then the LMA is set so the difference between the
4758VMA and LMA is the same as the difference between the VMA and LMA of
4759the last section in the located region.
4760
4761@item
4762If no memory regions have been declared then a default region
4763that covers the entire address space is used in the previous step.
4764
4765@item
4766If no suitable region could be found, or there was no previous
4767section then the LMA is set equal to the VMA.
4768@end itemize
252b5132
RH
4769
4770@cindex ROM initialized data
4771@cindex initialized data in ROM
4772This feature is designed to make it easy to build a ROM image. For
4773example, the following linker script creates three output sections: one
4774called @samp{.text}, which starts at @code{0x1000}, one called
4775@samp{.mdata}, which is loaded at the end of the @samp{.text} section
4776even though its VMA is @code{0x2000}, and one called @samp{.bss} to hold
4777uninitialized data at address @code{0x3000}. The symbol @code{_data} is
4778defined with the value @code{0x2000}, which shows that the location
4779counter holds the VMA value, not the LMA value.
4780
4781@smallexample
4782@group
4783SECTIONS
4784 @{
4785 .text 0x1000 : @{ *(.text) _etext = . ; @}
a1ab1d2a 4786 .mdata 0x2000 :
252b5132
RH
4787 AT ( ADDR (.text) + SIZEOF (.text) )
4788 @{ _data = . ; *(.data); _edata = . ; @}
4789 .bss 0x3000 :
4790 @{ _bstart = . ; *(.bss) *(COMMON) ; _bend = . ;@}
4791@}
4792@end group
4793@end smallexample
4794
4795The run-time initialization code for use with a program generated with
4796this linker script would include something like the following, to copy
4797the initialized data from the ROM image to its runtime address. Notice
4798how this code takes advantage of the symbols defined by the linker
4799script.
4800
4801@smallexample
4802@group
4803extern char _etext, _data, _edata, _bstart, _bend;
4804char *src = &_etext;
4805char *dst = &_data;
4806
ea5cae92
NC
4807/* ROM has data at end of text; copy it. */
4808while (dst < &_edata)
252b5132 4809 *dst++ = *src++;
252b5132 4810
ea5cae92 4811/* Zero bss. */
252b5132
RH
4812for (dst = &_bstart; dst< &_bend; dst++)
4813 *dst = 0;
4814@end group
4815@end smallexample
4816
bbf115d3
L
4817@node Forced Output Alignment
4818@subsubsection Forced Output Alignment
4819@kindex ALIGN(@var{section_align})
4820@cindex forcing output section alignment
4821@cindex output section alignment
1eec346e 4822You can increase an output section's alignment by using ALIGN. As an
13075d04
SH
4823alternative you can enforce that the difference between the VMA and LMA remains
4824intact throughout this output section with the ALIGN_WITH_INPUT attribute.
bbf115d3 4825
7e7d5768
AM
4826@node Forced Input Alignment
4827@subsubsection Forced Input Alignment
4828@kindex SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})
4829@cindex forcing input section alignment
4830@cindex input section alignment
4831You can force input section alignment within an output section by using
4832SUBALIGN. The value specified overrides any alignment given by input
4833sections, whether larger or smaller.
4834
0c71d759
NC
4835@node Output Section Constraint
4836@subsubsection Output Section Constraint
4837@kindex ONLY_IF_RO
4838@kindex ONLY_IF_RW
4839@cindex constraints on output sections
4840You can specify that an output section should only be created if all
4841of its input sections are read-only or all of its input sections are
4842read-write by using the keyword @code{ONLY_IF_RO} and
4843@code{ONLY_IF_RW} respectively.
4844
252b5132 4845@node Output Section Region
36f63dca 4846@subsubsection Output Section Region
252b5132
RH
4847@kindex >@var{region}
4848@cindex section, assigning to memory region
4849@cindex memory regions and sections
4850You can assign a section to a previously defined region of memory by
4851using @samp{>@var{region}}. @xref{MEMORY}.
4852
4853Here is a simple example:
4854@smallexample
4855@group
4856MEMORY @{ rom : ORIGIN = 0x1000, LENGTH = 0x1000 @}
4857SECTIONS @{ ROM : @{ *(.text) @} >rom @}
4858@end group
4859@end smallexample
4860
4861@node Output Section Phdr
36f63dca 4862@subsubsection Output Section Phdr
252b5132
RH
4863@kindex :@var{phdr}
4864@cindex section, assigning to program header
4865@cindex program headers and sections
4866You can assign a section to a previously defined program segment by
4867using @samp{:@var{phdr}}. @xref{PHDRS}. If a section is assigned to
4868one or more segments, then all subsequent allocated sections will be
4869assigned to those segments as well, unless they use an explicitly
4870@code{:@var{phdr}} modifier. You can use @code{:NONE} to tell the
4871linker to not put the section in any segment at all.
4872
4873Here is a simple example:
4874@smallexample
4875@group
4876PHDRS @{ text PT_LOAD ; @}
4877SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text @}
4878@end group
4879@end smallexample
4880
4881@node Output Section Fill
36f63dca 4882@subsubsection Output Section Fill
252b5132
RH
4883@kindex =@var{fillexp}
4884@cindex section fill pattern
4885@cindex fill pattern, entire section
4886You can set the fill pattern for an entire section by using
4887@samp{=@var{fillexp}}. @var{fillexp} is an expression
4888(@pxref{Expressions}). Any otherwise unspecified regions of memory
4889within the output section (for example, gaps left due to the required
a139d329
AM
4890alignment of input sections) will be filled with the value, repeated as
4891necessary. If the fill expression is a simple hex number, ie. a string
9673c93c 4892of hex digit starting with @samp{0x} and without a trailing @samp{k} or @samp{M}, then
a139d329
AM
4893an arbitrarily long sequence of hex digits can be used to specify the
4894fill pattern; Leading zeros become part of the pattern too. For all
9673c93c 4895other cases, including extra parentheses or a unary @code{+}, the fill
a139d329
AM
4896pattern is the four least significant bytes of the value of the
4897expression. In all cases, the number is big-endian.
252b5132
RH
4898
4899You can also change the fill value with a @code{FILL} command in the
9673c93c 4900output section commands; (@pxref{Output Section Data}).
252b5132
RH
4901
4902Here is a simple example:
4903@smallexample
4904@group
563e308f 4905SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} =0x90909090 @}
252b5132
RH
4906@end group
4907@end smallexample
4908
4909@node Overlay Description
36f63dca 4910@subsection Overlay Description
252b5132
RH
4911@kindex OVERLAY
4912@cindex overlays
4913An overlay description provides an easy way to describe sections which
4914are to be loaded as part of a single memory image but are to be run at
4915the same memory address. At run time, some sort of overlay manager will
4916copy the overlaid sections in and out of the runtime memory address as
4917required, perhaps by simply manipulating addressing bits. This approach
4918can be useful, for example, when a certain region of memory is faster
4919than another.
4920
4921Overlays are described using the @code{OVERLAY} command. The
4922@code{OVERLAY} command is used within a @code{SECTIONS} command, like an
4923output section description. The full syntax of the @code{OVERLAY}
4924command is as follows:
4925@smallexample
4926@group
4927OVERLAY [@var{start}] : [NOCROSSREFS] [AT ( @var{ldaddr} )]
4928 @{
4929 @var{secname1}
4930 @{
4931 @var{output-section-command}
4932 @var{output-section-command}
4933 @dots{}
4934 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4935 @var{secname2}
4936 @{
4937 @var{output-section-command}
4938 @var{output-section-command}
4939 @dots{}
4940 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4941 @dots{}
abc9061b 4942 @} [>@var{region}] [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}] [,]
252b5132
RH
4943@end group
4944@end smallexample
4945
4946Everything is optional except @code{OVERLAY} (a keyword), and each
4947section must have a name (@var{secname1} and @var{secname2} above). The
4948section definitions within the @code{OVERLAY} construct are identical to
11e7fd74 4949those within the general @code{SECTIONS} construct (@pxref{SECTIONS}),
252b5132
RH
4950except that no addresses and no memory regions may be defined for
4951sections within an @code{OVERLAY}.
4952
abc9061b
CC
4953The comma at the end may be required if a @var{fill} is used and
4954the next @var{sections-command} looks like a continuation of the expression.
4955
252b5132
RH
4956The sections are all defined with the same starting address. The load
4957addresses of the sections are arranged such that they are consecutive in
4958memory starting at the load address used for the @code{OVERLAY} as a
4959whole (as with normal section definitions, the load address is optional,
4960and defaults to the start address; the start address is also optional,
4961and defaults to the current value of the location counter).
4962
56dd11f0
NC
4963If the @code{NOCROSSREFS} keyword is used, and there are any
4964references among the sections, the linker will report an error. Since
4965the sections all run at the same address, it normally does not make
4966sense for one section to refer directly to another.
4967@xref{Miscellaneous Commands, NOCROSSREFS}.
252b5132
RH
4968
4969For each section within the @code{OVERLAY}, the linker automatically
34711ca3 4970provides two symbols. The symbol @code{__load_start_@var{secname}} is
252b5132
RH
4971defined as the starting load address of the section. The symbol
4972@code{__load_stop_@var{secname}} is defined as the final load address of
4973the section. Any characters within @var{secname} which are not legal
4974within C identifiers are removed. C (or assembler) code may use these
4975symbols to move the overlaid sections around as necessary.
4976
4977At the end of the overlay, the value of the location counter is set to
4978the start address of the overlay plus the size of the largest section.
4979
4980Here is an example. Remember that this would appear inside a
4981@code{SECTIONS} construct.
4982@smallexample
4983@group
4984 OVERLAY 0x1000 : AT (0x4000)
4985 @{
4986 .text0 @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
4987 .text1 @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
4988 @}
4989@end group
4990@end smallexample
4991@noindent
4992This will define both @samp{.text0} and @samp{.text1} to start at
4993address 0x1000. @samp{.text0} will be loaded at address 0x4000, and
4994@samp{.text1} will be loaded immediately after @samp{.text0}. The
34711ca3 4995following symbols will be defined if referenced: @code{__load_start_text0},
252b5132
RH
4996@code{__load_stop_text0}, @code{__load_start_text1},
4997@code{__load_stop_text1}.
4998
4999C code to copy overlay @code{.text1} into the overlay area might look
5000like the following.
5001
5002@smallexample
5003@group
5004 extern char __load_start_text1, __load_stop_text1;
5005 memcpy ((char *) 0x1000, &__load_start_text1,
5006 &__load_stop_text1 - &__load_start_text1);
5007@end group
5008@end smallexample
5009
5010Note that the @code{OVERLAY} command is just syntactic sugar, since
5011everything it does can be done using the more basic commands. The above
5012example could have been written identically as follows.
5013
5014@smallexample
5015@group
5016 .text0 0x1000 : AT (0x4000) @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
34711ca3
AM
5017 PROVIDE (__load_start_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0));
5018 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0) + SIZEOF (.text0));
252b5132 5019 .text1 0x1000 : AT (0x4000 + SIZEOF (.text0)) @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
34711ca3
AM
5020 PROVIDE (__load_start_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1));
5021 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1) + SIZEOF (.text1));
252b5132
RH
5022 . = 0x1000 + MAX (SIZEOF (.text0), SIZEOF (.text1));
5023@end group
5024@end smallexample
5025
5026@node MEMORY
36f63dca 5027@section MEMORY Command
252b5132
RH
5028@kindex MEMORY
5029@cindex memory regions
5030@cindex regions of memory
5031@cindex allocating memory
5032@cindex discontinuous memory
5033The linker's default configuration permits allocation of all available
5034memory. You can override this by using the @code{MEMORY} command.
5035
5036The @code{MEMORY} command describes the location and size of blocks of
5037memory in the target. You can use it to describe which memory regions
5038may be used by the linker, and which memory regions it must avoid. You
5039can then assign sections to particular memory regions. The linker will
5040set section addresses based on the memory regions, and will warn about
5041regions that become too full. The linker will not shuffle sections
5042around to fit into the available regions.
5043
127fcdff
AB
5044A linker script may contain many uses of the @code{MEMORY} command,
5045however, all memory blocks defined are treated as if they were
5046specified inside a single @code{MEMORY} command. The syntax for
5047@code{MEMORY} is:
252b5132
RH
5048@smallexample
5049@group
a1ab1d2a 5050MEMORY
252b5132
RH
5051 @{
5052 @var{name} [(@var{attr})] : ORIGIN = @var{origin}, LENGTH = @var{len}
5053 @dots{}
5054 @}
5055@end group
5056@end smallexample
5057
5058The @var{name} is a name used in the linker script to refer to the
5059region. The region name has no meaning outside of the linker script.
5060Region names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
5061with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each memory region
4a93e180
NC
5062must have a distinct name within the @code{MEMORY} command. However you can
5063add later alias names to existing memory regions with the @ref{REGION_ALIAS}
9d5777a3 5064command.
252b5132
RH
5065
5066@cindex memory region attributes
5067The @var{attr} string is an optional list of attributes that specify
5068whether to use a particular memory region for an input section which is
5069not explicitly mapped in the linker script. As described in
5070@ref{SECTIONS}, if you do not specify an output section for some input
5071section, the linker will create an output section with the same name as
5072the input section. If you define region attributes, the linker will use
5073them to select the memory region for the output section that it creates.
5074
5075The @var{attr} string must consist only of the following characters:
5076@table @samp
5077@item R
5078Read-only section
5079@item W
5080Read/write section
5081@item X
5082Executable section
5083@item A
5084Allocatable section
5085@item I
5086Initialized section
5087@item L
5088Same as @samp{I}
5089@item !
c09e9a8c 5090Invert the sense of any of the attributes that follow
252b5132
RH
5091@end table
5092
5093If a unmapped section matches any of the listed attributes other than
5094@samp{!}, it will be placed in the memory region. The @samp{!}
5095attribute reverses this test, so that an unmapped section will be placed
5096in the memory region only if it does not match any of the listed
5097attributes.
5098
5099@kindex ORIGIN =
5100@kindex o =
5101@kindex org =
9cd6d51a
NC
5102The @var{origin} is an numerical expression for the start address of
5103the memory region. The expression must evaluate to a constant and it
5104cannot involve any symbols. The keyword @code{ORIGIN} may be
5105abbreviated to @code{org} or @code{o} (but not, for example,
5106@code{ORG}).
252b5132
RH
5107
5108@kindex LENGTH =
5109@kindex len =
5110@kindex l =
5111The @var{len} is an expression for the size in bytes of the memory
5112region. As with the @var{origin} expression, the expression must
9cd6d51a
NC
5113be numerical only and must evaluate to a constant. The keyword
5114@code{LENGTH} may be abbreviated to @code{len} or @code{l}.
252b5132
RH
5115
5116In the following example, we specify that there are two memory regions
5117available for allocation: one starting at @samp{0} for 256 kilobytes,
5118and the other starting at @samp{0x40000000} for four megabytes. The
5119linker will place into the @samp{rom} memory region every section which
5120is not explicitly mapped into a memory region, and is either read-only
5121or executable. The linker will place other sections which are not
5122explicitly mapped into a memory region into the @samp{ram} memory
5123region.
5124
5125@smallexample
5126@group
a1ab1d2a 5127MEMORY
252b5132
RH
5128 @{
5129 rom (rx) : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 256K
5130 ram (!rx) : org = 0x40000000, l = 4M
5131 @}
5132@end group
5133@end smallexample
5134
5135Once you define a memory region, you can direct the linker to place
5136specific output sections into that memory region by using the
5137@samp{>@var{region}} output section attribute. For example, if you have
5138a memory region named @samp{mem}, you would use @samp{>mem} in the
5139output section definition. @xref{Output Section Region}. If no address
5140was specified for the output section, the linker will set the address to
5141the next available address within the memory region. If the combined
5142output sections directed to a memory region are too large for the
5143region, the linker will issue an error message.
5144
3ec57632 5145It is possible to access the origin and length of a memory in an
c0065db7 5146expression via the @code{ORIGIN(@var{memory})} and
3ec57632
NC
5147@code{LENGTH(@var{memory})} functions:
5148
5149@smallexample
5150@group
c0065db7 5151 _fstack = ORIGIN(ram) + LENGTH(ram) - 4;
3ec57632
NC
5152@end group
5153@end smallexample
5154
252b5132
RH
5155@node PHDRS
5156@section PHDRS Command
5157@kindex PHDRS
5158@cindex program headers
5159@cindex ELF program headers
5160@cindex program segments
5161@cindex segments, ELF
5162The ELF object file format uses @dfn{program headers}, also knows as
5163@dfn{segments}. The program headers describe how the program should be
5164loaded into memory. You can print them out by using the @code{objdump}
5165program with the @samp{-p} option.
5166
5167When you run an ELF program on a native ELF system, the system loader
5168reads the program headers in order to figure out how to load the
5169program. This will only work if the program headers are set correctly.
5170This manual does not describe the details of how the system loader
5171interprets program headers; for more information, see the ELF ABI.
5172
5173The linker will create reasonable program headers by default. However,
5174in some cases, you may need to specify the program headers more
5175precisely. You may use the @code{PHDRS} command for this purpose. When
5176the linker sees the @code{PHDRS} command in the linker script, it will
5177not create any program headers other than the ones specified.
5178
5179The linker only pays attention to the @code{PHDRS} command when
5180generating an ELF output file. In other cases, the linker will simply
5181ignore @code{PHDRS}.
5182
5183This is the syntax of the @code{PHDRS} command. The words @code{PHDRS},
5184@code{FILEHDR}, @code{AT}, and @code{FLAGS} are keywords.
5185
5186@smallexample
5187@group
5188PHDRS
5189@{
5190 @var{name} @var{type} [ FILEHDR ] [ PHDRS ] [ AT ( @var{address} ) ]
5191 [ FLAGS ( @var{flags} ) ] ;
5192@}
5193@end group
5194@end smallexample
5195
5196The @var{name} is used only for reference in the @code{SECTIONS} command
5197of the linker script. It is not put into the output file. Program
5198header names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
5199with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each program header
5c1a3f0f
NS
5200must have a distinct name. The headers are processed in order and it
5201is usual for them to map to sections in ascending load address order.
252b5132
RH
5202
5203Certain program header types describe segments of memory which the
5204system loader will load from the file. In the linker script, you
5205specify the contents of these segments by placing allocatable output
5206sections in the segments. You use the @samp{:@var{phdr}} output section
5207attribute to place a section in a particular segment. @xref{Output
5208Section Phdr}.
5209
5210It is normal to put certain sections in more than one segment. This
5211merely implies that one segment of memory contains another. You may
5212repeat @samp{:@var{phdr}}, using it once for each segment which should
5213contain the section.
5214
5215If you place a section in one or more segments using @samp{:@var{phdr}},
5216then the linker will place all subsequent allocatable sections which do
5217not specify @samp{:@var{phdr}} in the same segments. This is for
5218convenience, since generally a whole set of contiguous sections will be
5219placed in a single segment. You can use @code{:NONE} to override the
5220default segment and tell the linker to not put the section in any
5221segment at all.
5222
5223@kindex FILEHDR
5224@kindex PHDRS
5c1a3f0f 5225You may use the @code{FILEHDR} and @code{PHDRS} keywords after
252b5132
RH
5226the program header type to further describe the contents of the segment.
5227The @code{FILEHDR} keyword means that the segment should include the ELF
5228file header. The @code{PHDRS} keyword means that the segment should
5c1a3f0f 5229include the ELF program headers themselves. If applied to a loadable
4100cea3
AM
5230segment (@code{PT_LOAD}), all prior loadable segments must have one of
5231these keywords.
252b5132
RH
5232
5233The @var{type} may be one of the following. The numbers indicate the
5234value of the keyword.
5235
5236@table @asis
5237@item @code{PT_NULL} (0)
5238Indicates an unused program header.
5239
5240@item @code{PT_LOAD} (1)
5241Indicates that this program header describes a segment to be loaded from
5242the file.
5243
5244@item @code{PT_DYNAMIC} (2)
5245Indicates a segment where dynamic linking information can be found.
5246
5247@item @code{PT_INTERP} (3)
5248Indicates a segment where the name of the program interpreter may be
5249found.
5250
5251@item @code{PT_NOTE} (4)
5252Indicates a segment holding note information.
5253
5254@item @code{PT_SHLIB} (5)
5255A reserved program header type, defined but not specified by the ELF
5256ABI.
5257
5258@item @code{PT_PHDR} (6)
5259Indicates a segment where the program headers may be found.
5260
5261@item @var{expression}
5262An expression giving the numeric type of the program header. This may
5263be used for types not defined above.
5264@end table
5265
5266You can specify that a segment should be loaded at a particular address
5267in memory by using an @code{AT} expression. This is identical to the
5268@code{AT} command used as an output section attribute (@pxref{Output
5269Section LMA}). The @code{AT} command for a program header overrides the
5270output section attribute.
5271
5272The linker will normally set the segment flags based on the sections
5273which comprise the segment. You may use the @code{FLAGS} keyword to
5274explicitly specify the segment flags. The value of @var{flags} must be
5275an integer. It is used to set the @code{p_flags} field of the program
5276header.
5277
5278Here is an example of @code{PHDRS}. This shows a typical set of program
5279headers used on a native ELF system.
5280
5281@example
5282@group
5283PHDRS
5284@{
5285 headers PT_PHDR PHDRS ;
5286 interp PT_INTERP ;
5287 text PT_LOAD FILEHDR PHDRS ;
5288 data PT_LOAD ;
5289 dynamic PT_DYNAMIC ;
5290@}
5291
5292SECTIONS
5293@{
5294 . = SIZEOF_HEADERS;
5295 .interp : @{ *(.interp) @} :text :interp
5296 .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text
5297 .rodata : @{ *(.rodata) @} /* defaults to :text */
5298 @dots{}
5299 . = . + 0x1000; /* move to a new page in memory */
5300 .data : @{ *(.data) @} :data
5301 .dynamic : @{ *(.dynamic) @} :data :dynamic
5302 @dots{}
5303@}
5304@end group
5305@end example
5306
5307@node VERSION
5308@section VERSION Command
5309@kindex VERSION @{script text@}
5310@cindex symbol versions
5311@cindex version script
5312@cindex versions of symbols
5313The linker supports symbol versions when using ELF. Symbol versions are
5314only useful when using shared libraries. The dynamic linker can use
5315symbol versions to select a specific version of a function when it runs
5316a program that may have been linked against an earlier version of the
5317shared library.
5318
5319You can include a version script directly in the main linker script, or
5320you can supply the version script as an implicit linker script. You can
5321also use the @samp{--version-script} linker option.
5322
5323The syntax of the @code{VERSION} command is simply
5324@smallexample
5325VERSION @{ version-script-commands @}
5326@end smallexample
5327
5328The format of the version script commands is identical to that used by
5329Sun's linker in Solaris 2.5. The version script defines a tree of
5330version nodes. You specify the node names and interdependencies in the
5331version script. You can specify which symbols are bound to which
5332version nodes, and you can reduce a specified set of symbols to local
5333scope so that they are not globally visible outside of the shared
5334library.
5335
5336The easiest way to demonstrate the version script language is with a few
5337examples.
5338
5339@smallexample
5340VERS_1.1 @{
5341 global:
5342 foo1;
5343 local:
a1ab1d2a
UD
5344 old*;
5345 original*;
5346 new*;
252b5132
RH
5347@};
5348
5349VERS_1.2 @{
5350 foo2;
5351@} VERS_1.1;
5352
5353VERS_2.0 @{
5354 bar1; bar2;
c0065db7 5355 extern "C++" @{
86043bbb 5356 ns::*;
bb1515f2
MF
5357 "f(int, double)";
5358 @};
252b5132
RH
5359@} VERS_1.2;
5360@end smallexample
5361
5362This example version script defines three version nodes. The first
5363version node defined is @samp{VERS_1.1}; it has no other dependencies.
5364The script binds the symbol @samp{foo1} to @samp{VERS_1.1}. It reduces
5365a number of symbols to local scope so that they are not visible outside
313e35ee
AM
5366of the shared library; this is done using wildcard patterns, so that any
5367symbol whose name begins with @samp{old}, @samp{original}, or @samp{new}
5368is matched. The wildcard patterns available are the same as those used
5369in the shell when matching filenames (also known as ``globbing'').
86043bbb
MM
5370However, if you specify the symbol name inside double quotes, then the
5371name is treated as literal, rather than as a glob pattern.
252b5132
RH
5372
5373Next, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_1.2}. This node
5374depends upon @samp{VERS_1.1}. The script binds the symbol @samp{foo2}
5375to the version node @samp{VERS_1.2}.
5376
5377Finally, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_2.0}. This node
5378depends upon @samp{VERS_1.2}. The scripts binds the symbols @samp{bar1}
5379and @samp{bar2} are bound to the version node @samp{VERS_2.0}.
5380
5381When the linker finds a symbol defined in a library which is not
5382specifically bound to a version node, it will effectively bind it to an
5383unspecified base version of the library. You can bind all otherwise
a981ed6f 5384unspecified symbols to a given version node by using @samp{global: *;}
ae5a3597
AM
5385somewhere in the version script. Note that it's slightly crazy to use
5386wildcards in a global spec except on the last version node. Global
5387wildcards elsewhere run the risk of accidentally adding symbols to the
5388set exported for an old version. That's wrong since older versions
5389ought to have a fixed set of symbols.
252b5132
RH
5390
5391The names of the version nodes have no specific meaning other than what
5392they might suggest to the person reading them. The @samp{2.0} version
5393could just as well have appeared in between @samp{1.1} and @samp{1.2}.
5394However, this would be a confusing way to write a version script.
5395
0f6bf451 5396Node name can be omitted, provided it is the only version node
6b9b879a
JJ
5397in the version script. Such version script doesn't assign any versions to
5398symbols, only selects which symbols will be globally visible out and which
5399won't.
5400
5401@smallexample
7c9c73be 5402@{ global: foo; bar; local: *; @};
9d201f2f 5403@end smallexample
6b9b879a 5404
252b5132
RH
5405When you link an application against a shared library that has versioned
5406symbols, the application itself knows which version of each symbol it
5407requires, and it also knows which version nodes it needs from each
5408shared library it is linked against. Thus at runtime, the dynamic
5409loader can make a quick check to make sure that the libraries you have
5410linked against do in fact supply all of the version nodes that the
5411application will need to resolve all of the dynamic symbols. In this
5412way it is possible for the dynamic linker to know with certainty that
5413all external symbols that it needs will be resolvable without having to
5414search for each symbol reference.
5415
5416The symbol versioning is in effect a much more sophisticated way of
5417doing minor version checking that SunOS does. The fundamental problem
5418that is being addressed here is that typically references to external
5419functions are bound on an as-needed basis, and are not all bound when
5420the application starts up. If a shared library is out of date, a
5421required interface may be missing; when the application tries to use
5422that interface, it may suddenly and unexpectedly fail. With symbol
5423versioning, the user will get a warning when they start their program if
5424the libraries being used with the application are too old.
5425
5426There are several GNU extensions to Sun's versioning approach. The
5427first of these is the ability to bind a symbol to a version node in the
5428source file where the symbol is defined instead of in the versioning
5429script. This was done mainly to reduce the burden on the library
5430maintainer. You can do this by putting something like:
5431@smallexample
5432__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5433@end smallexample
5434@noindent
5435in the C source file. This renames the function @samp{original_foo} to
5436be an alias for @samp{foo} bound to the version node @samp{VERS_1.1}.
5437The @samp{local:} directive can be used to prevent the symbol
96a94295
L
5438@samp{original_foo} from being exported. A @samp{.symver} directive
5439takes precedence over a version script.
252b5132
RH
5440
5441The second GNU extension is to allow multiple versions of the same
5442function to appear in a given shared library. In this way you can make
5443an incompatible change to an interface without increasing the major
5444version number of the shared library, while still allowing applications
5445linked against the old interface to continue to function.
5446
5447To do this, you must use multiple @samp{.symver} directives in the
5448source file. Here is an example:
5449
5450@smallexample
5451__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@");
5452__asm__(".symver old_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5453__asm__(".symver old_foo1,foo@@VERS_1.2");
5454__asm__(".symver new_foo,foo@@@@VERS_2.0");
5455@end smallexample
5456
5457In this example, @samp{foo@@} represents the symbol @samp{foo} bound to the
5458unspecified base version of the symbol. The source file that contains this
5459example would define 4 C functions: @samp{original_foo}, @samp{old_foo},
5460@samp{old_foo1}, and @samp{new_foo}.
5461
5462When you have multiple definitions of a given symbol, there needs to be
5463some way to specify a default version to which external references to
5464this symbol will be bound. You can do this with the
5465@samp{foo@@@@VERS_2.0} type of @samp{.symver} directive. You can only
5466declare one version of a symbol as the default in this manner; otherwise
5467you would effectively have multiple definitions of the same symbol.
5468
5469If you wish to bind a reference to a specific version of the symbol
5470within the shared library, you can use the aliases of convenience
36f63dca 5471(i.e., @samp{old_foo}), or you can use the @samp{.symver} directive to
252b5132
RH
5472specifically bind to an external version of the function in question.
5473
cb840a31
L
5474You can also specify the language in the version script:
5475
5476@smallexample
5477VERSION extern "lang" @{ version-script-commands @}
5478@end smallexample
5479
c0065db7 5480The supported @samp{lang}s are @samp{C}, @samp{C++}, and @samp{Java}.
cb840a31
L
5481The linker will iterate over the list of symbols at the link time and
5482demangle them according to @samp{lang} before matching them to the
bb1515f2
MF
5483patterns specified in @samp{version-script-commands}. The default
5484@samp{lang} is @samp{C}.
cb840a31 5485
86043bbb
MM
5486Demangled names may contains spaces and other special characters. As
5487described above, you can use a glob pattern to match demangled names,
5488or you can use a double-quoted string to match the string exactly. In
5489the latter case, be aware that minor differences (such as differing
5490whitespace) between the version script and the demangler output will
5491cause a mismatch. As the exact string generated by the demangler
5492might change in the future, even if the mangled name does not, you
5493should check that all of your version directives are behaving as you
5494expect when you upgrade.
5495
252b5132
RH
5496@node Expressions
5497@section Expressions in Linker Scripts
5498@cindex expressions
5499@cindex arithmetic
5500The syntax for expressions in the linker script language is identical to
5501that of C expressions. All expressions are evaluated as integers. All
5502expressions are evaluated in the same size, which is 32 bits if both the
5503host and target are 32 bits, and is otherwise 64 bits.
5504
5505You can use and set symbol values in expressions.
5506
5507The linker defines several special purpose builtin functions for use in
5508expressions.
5509
5510@menu
5511* Constants:: Constants
0c71d759 5512* Symbolic Constants:: Symbolic constants
252b5132 5513* Symbols:: Symbol Names
ecca9871 5514* Orphan Sections:: Orphan Sections
252b5132
RH
5515* Location Counter:: The Location Counter
5516* Operators:: Operators
5517* Evaluation:: Evaluation
5518* Expression Section:: The Section of an Expression
5519* Builtin Functions:: Builtin Functions
5520@end menu
5521
5522@node Constants
5523@subsection Constants
5524@cindex integer notation
5525@cindex constants in linker scripts
5526All constants are integers.
5527
5528As in C, the linker considers an integer beginning with @samp{0} to be
5529octal, and an integer beginning with @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} to be
8a308ae8 5530hexadecimal. Alternatively the linker accepts suffixes of @samp{h} or
11e7fd74 5531@samp{H} for hexadecimal, @samp{o} or @samp{O} for octal, @samp{b} or
8a308ae8
NC
5532@samp{B} for binary and @samp{d} or @samp{D} for decimal. Any integer
5533value without a prefix or a suffix is considered to be decimal.
252b5132
RH
5534
5535@cindex scaled integers
5536@cindex K and M integer suffixes
5537@cindex M and K integer suffixes
5538@cindex suffixes for integers
5539@cindex integer suffixes
5540In addition, you can use the suffixes @code{K} and @code{M} to scale a
5541constant by
5542@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5543@ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5544@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5545@code{1024} or @code{1024*1024}
5546@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5547@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5548@tex
5549${\rm 1024}$ or ${\rm 1024}^2$
5550@end tex
5551@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
8a308ae8
NC
5552respectively. For example, the following
5553all refer to the same quantity:
5554
252b5132 5555@smallexample
36f63dca
NC
5556_fourk_1 = 4K;
5557_fourk_2 = 4096;
5558_fourk_3 = 0x1000;
8a308ae8 5559_fourk_4 = 10000o;
252b5132
RH
5560@end smallexample
5561
8a308ae8
NC
5562Note - the @code{K} and @code{M} suffixes cannot be used in
5563conjunction with the base suffixes mentioned above.
5564
0c71d759
NC
5565@node Symbolic Constants
5566@subsection Symbolic Constants
5567@cindex symbolic constants
5568@kindex CONSTANT
5569It is possible to refer to target specific constants via the use of
5570the @code{CONSTANT(@var{name})} operator, where @var{name} is one of:
5571
5572@table @code
5573@item MAXPAGESIZE
5574@kindex MAXPAGESIZE
5575The target's maximum page size.
5576
5577@item COMMONPAGESIZE
5578@kindex COMMONPAGESIZE
5579The target's default page size.
5580@end table
5581
5582So for example:
5583
5584@smallexample
9d5777a3 5585 .text ALIGN (CONSTANT (MAXPAGESIZE)) : @{ *(.text) @}
0c71d759
NC
5586@end smallexample
5587
5588will create a text section aligned to the largest page boundary
5589supported by the target.
5590
252b5132
RH
5591@node Symbols
5592@subsection Symbol Names
5593@cindex symbol names
5594@cindex names
5595@cindex quoted symbol names
5596@kindex "
5597Unless quoted, symbol names start with a letter, underscore, or period
5598and may include letters, digits, underscores, periods, and hyphens.
5599Unquoted symbol names must not conflict with any keywords. You can
5600specify a symbol which contains odd characters or has the same name as a
5601keyword by surrounding the symbol name in double quotes:
5602@smallexample
36f63dca
NC
5603"SECTION" = 9;
5604"with a space" = "also with a space" + 10;
252b5132
RH
5605@end smallexample
5606
5607Since symbols can contain many non-alphabetic characters, it is safest
5608to delimit symbols with spaces. For example, @samp{A-B} is one symbol,
5609whereas @samp{A - B} is an expression involving subtraction.
5610
ecca9871
L
5611@node Orphan Sections
5612@subsection Orphan Sections
5613@cindex orphan
5614Orphan sections are sections present in the input files which
5615are not explicitly placed into the output file by the linker
5616script. The linker will still copy these sections into the
5617output file, but it has to guess as to where they should be
5618placed. The linker uses a simple heuristic to do this. It
5619attempts to place orphan sections after non-orphan sections of the
5620same attribute, such as code vs data, loadable vs non-loadable, etc.
5621If there is not enough room to do this then it places
5622at the end of the file.
5623
5624For ELF targets, the attribute of the section includes section type as
5625well as section flag.
5626
c005eb9e
AB
5627The command line options @samp{--orphan-handling} and @samp{--unique}
5628(@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}) can be used to control which
5629output sections an orphan is placed in.
5630
41911f68 5631If an orphaned section's name is representable as a C identifier then
a61ca861 5632the linker will automatically @pxref{PROVIDE} two symbols:
9aec8434 5633__start_SECNAME and __stop_SECNAME, where SECNAME is the name of the
41911f68
NC
5634section. These indicate the start address and end address of the
5635orphaned section respectively. Note: most section names are not
5636representable as C identifiers because they contain a @samp{.}
5637character.
5638
252b5132
RH
5639@node Location Counter
5640@subsection The Location Counter
5641@kindex .
5642@cindex dot
5643@cindex location counter
5644@cindex current output location
5645The special linker variable @dfn{dot} @samp{.} always contains the
5646current output location counter. Since the @code{.} always refers to a
5647location in an output section, it may only appear in an expression
5648within a @code{SECTIONS} command. The @code{.} symbol may appear
5649anywhere that an ordinary symbol is allowed in an expression.
5650
5651@cindex holes
5652Assigning a value to @code{.} will cause the location counter to be
5653moved. This may be used to create holes in the output section. The
dc0b6aa0
AM
5654location counter may not be moved backwards inside an output section,
5655and may not be moved backwards outside of an output section if so
5656doing creates areas with overlapping LMAs.
252b5132
RH
5657
5658@smallexample
5659SECTIONS
5660@{
5661 output :
5662 @{
5663 file1(.text)
5664 . = . + 1000;
5665 file2(.text)
5666 . += 1000;
5667 file3(.text)
563e308f 5668 @} = 0x12345678;
252b5132
RH
5669@}
5670@end smallexample
5671@noindent
5672In the previous example, the @samp{.text} section from @file{file1} is
5673located at the beginning of the output section @samp{output}. It is
5674followed by a 1000 byte gap. Then the @samp{.text} section from
5675@file{file2} appears, also with a 1000 byte gap following before the
563e308f 5676@samp{.text} section from @file{file3}. The notation @samp{= 0x12345678}
252b5132
RH
5677specifies what data to write in the gaps (@pxref{Output Section Fill}).
5678
5c6bbab8
NC
5679@cindex dot inside sections
5680Note: @code{.} actually refers to the byte offset from the start of the
5681current containing object. Normally this is the @code{SECTIONS}
69da35b5 5682statement, whose start address is 0, hence @code{.} can be used as an
5c6bbab8
NC
5683absolute address. If @code{.} is used inside a section description
5684however, it refers to the byte offset from the start of that section,
5685not an absolute address. Thus in a script like this:
5686
5687@smallexample
5688SECTIONS
5689@{
5690 . = 0x100
5691 .text: @{
5692 *(.text)
5693 . = 0x200
5694 @}
5695 . = 0x500
5696 .data: @{
5697 *(.data)
5698 . += 0x600
5699 @}
5700@}
5701@end smallexample
5702
5703The @samp{.text} section will be assigned a starting address of 0x100
5704and a size of exactly 0x200 bytes, even if there is not enough data in
5705the @samp{.text} input sections to fill this area. (If there is too
5706much data, an error will be produced because this would be an attempt to
5707move @code{.} backwards). The @samp{.data} section will start at 0x500
5708and it will have an extra 0x600 bytes worth of space after the end of
5709the values from the @samp{.data} input sections and before the end of
5710the @samp{.data} output section itself.
5711
b5666f2f
AM
5712@cindex dot outside sections
5713Setting symbols to the value of the location counter outside of an
5714output section statement can result in unexpected values if the linker
5715needs to place orphan sections. For example, given the following:
5716
5717@smallexample
5718SECTIONS
5719@{
5720 start_of_text = . ;
5721 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5722 end_of_text = . ;
5723
5724 start_of_data = . ;
5725 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5726 end_of_data = . ;
5727@}
5728@end smallexample
5729
5730If the linker needs to place some input section, e.g. @code{.rodata},
5731not mentioned in the script, it might choose to place that section
5732between @code{.text} and @code{.data}. You might think the linker
5733should place @code{.rodata} on the blank line in the above script, but
5734blank lines are of no particular significance to the linker. As well,
5735the linker doesn't associate the above symbol names with their
5736sections. Instead, it assumes that all assignments or other
5737statements belong to the previous output section, except for the
5738special case of an assignment to @code{.}. I.e., the linker will
5739place the orphan @code{.rodata} section as if the script was written
5740as follows:
5741
5742@smallexample
5743SECTIONS
5744@{
5745 start_of_text = . ;
5746 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5747 end_of_text = . ;
5748
5749 start_of_data = . ;
5750 .rodata: @{ *(.rodata) @}
5751 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5752 end_of_data = . ;
5753@}
5754@end smallexample
5755
5756This may or may not be the script author's intention for the value of
5757@code{start_of_data}. One way to influence the orphan section
5758placement is to assign the location counter to itself, as the linker
5759assumes that an assignment to @code{.} is setting the start address of
5760a following output section and thus should be grouped with that
5761section. So you could write:
5762
5763@smallexample
5764SECTIONS
5765@{
5766 start_of_text = . ;
5767 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5768 end_of_text = . ;
5769
5770 . = . ;
5771 start_of_data = . ;
5772 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5773 end_of_data = . ;
5774@}
5775@end smallexample
5776
5777Now, the orphan @code{.rodata} section will be placed between
5778@code{end_of_text} and @code{start_of_data}.
5779
252b5132
RH
5780@need 2000
5781@node Operators
5782@subsection Operators
5783@cindex operators for arithmetic
5784@cindex arithmetic operators
5785@cindex precedence in expressions
5786The linker recognizes the standard C set of arithmetic operators, with
5787the standard bindings and precedence levels:
5788@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5789@ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5790@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5791@smallexample
5792precedence associativity Operators Notes
5793(highest)
57941 left ! - ~ (1)
57952 left * / %
57963 left + -
57974 left >> <<
57985 left == != > < <= >=
57996 left &
58007 left |
58018 left &&
58029 left ||
580310 right ? :
580411 right &= += -= *= /= (2)
5805(lowest)
5806@end smallexample
5807Notes:
a1ab1d2a 5808(1) Prefix operators
252b5132
RH
5809(2) @xref{Assignments}.
5810@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5811@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5812@tex
5813\vskip \baselineskip
5814%"lispnarrowing" is the extra indent used generally for smallexample
5815\hskip\lispnarrowing\vbox{\offinterlineskip
5816\hrule
5817\halign
5818{\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ {\tt #}\ \hfil&\vrule#\cr
5819height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5820&Precedence&& Associativity &&{\rm Operators}&\cr
5821height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5822\noalign{\hrule}
5823height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5824&highest&&&&&\cr
5825% '176 is tilde, '~' in tt font
a1ab1d2a 5826&1&&left&&\qquad- \char'176\ !\qquad\dag&\cr
252b5132
RH
5827&2&&left&&* / \%&\cr
5828&3&&left&&+ -&\cr
5829&4&&left&&>> <<&\cr
5830&5&&left&&== != > < <= >=&\cr
5831&6&&left&&\&&\cr
5832&7&&left&&|&\cr
5833&8&&left&&{\&\&}&\cr
5834&9&&left&&||&\cr
5835&10&&right&&? :&\cr
5836&11&&right&&\qquad\&= += -= *= /=\qquad\ddag&\cr
5837&lowest&&&&&\cr
5838height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr}
5839\hrule}
5840@end tex
5841@iftex
5842{
5843@obeylines@parskip=0pt@parindent=0pt
5844@dag@quad Prefix operators.
5845@ddag@quad @xref{Assignments}.
5846}
5847@end iftex
5848@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5849
5850@node Evaluation
5851@subsection Evaluation
5852@cindex lazy evaluation
5853@cindex expression evaluation order
5854The linker evaluates expressions lazily. It only computes the value of
5855an expression when absolutely necessary.
5856
5857The linker needs some information, such as the value of the start
5858address of the first section, and the origins and lengths of memory
5859regions, in order to do any linking at all. These values are computed
5860as soon as possible when the linker reads in the linker script.
5861
5862However, other values (such as symbol values) are not known or needed
5863until after storage allocation. Such values are evaluated later, when
5864other information (such as the sizes of output sections) is available
5865for use in the symbol assignment expression.
5866
5867The sizes of sections cannot be known until after allocation, so
5868assignments dependent upon these are not performed until after
5869allocation.
5870
5871Some expressions, such as those depending upon the location counter
5872@samp{.}, must be evaluated during section allocation.
5873
5874If the result of an expression is required, but the value is not
5875available, then an error results. For example, a script like the
5876following
5877@smallexample
5878@group
5879SECTIONS
5880 @{
a1ab1d2a 5881 .text 9+this_isnt_constant :
252b5132
RH
5882 @{ *(.text) @}
5883 @}
5884@end group
5885@end smallexample
5886@noindent
5887will cause the error message @samp{non constant expression for initial
5888address}.
5889
5890@node Expression Section
5891@subsection The Section of an Expression
5892@cindex expression sections
5893@cindex absolute expressions
5894@cindex relative expressions
5895@cindex absolute and relocatable symbols
5896@cindex relocatable and absolute symbols
5897@cindex symbols, relocatable and absolute
7542af2a
AM
5898Addresses and symbols may be section relative, or absolute. A section
5899relative symbol is relocatable. If you request relocatable output
5900using the @samp{-r} option, a further link operation may change the
5901value of a section relative symbol. On the other hand, an absolute
5902symbol will retain the same value throughout any further link
5903operations.
5904
abf4be64
AM
5905Some terms in linker expressions are addresses. This is true of
5906section relative symbols and for builtin functions that return an
5907address, such as @code{ADDR}, @code{LOADADDR}, @code{ORIGIN} and
5908@code{SEGMENT_START}. Other terms are simply numbers, or are builtin
5909functions that return a non-address value, such as @code{LENGTH}.
01554a74
AM
5910One complication is that unless you set @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")}
5911(@pxref{Miscellaneous Commands}), numbers and absolute symbols are treated
5c3049d2
AM
5912differently depending on their location, for compatibility with older
5913versions of @code{ld}. Expressions appearing outside an output
5914section definition treat all numbers as absolute addresses.
5915Expressions appearing inside an output section definition treat
01554a74
AM
5916absolute symbols as numbers. If @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")} is
5917given, then absolute symbols and numbers are simply treated as numbers
5918everywhere.
5c3049d2
AM
5919
5920In the following simple example,
252b5132 5921
7542af2a
AM
5922@smallexample
5923@group
5924SECTIONS
5925 @{
5926 . = 0x100;
5927 __executable_start = 0x100;
5928 .data :
5929 @{
5930 . = 0x10;
5931 __data_start = 0x10;
5932 *(.data)
5933 @}
5934 @dots{}
5935 @}
5936@end group
5937@end smallexample
252b5132 5938
7542af2a
AM
5939both @code{.} and @code{__executable_start} are set to the absolute
5940address 0x100 in the first two assignments, then both @code{.} and
5941@code{__data_start} are set to 0x10 relative to the @code{.data}
5942section in the second two assignments.
252b5132 5943
5c3049d2
AM
5944For expressions involving numbers, relative addresses and absolute
5945addresses, ld follows these rules to evaluate terms:
7542af2a
AM
5946
5947@itemize @bullet
5948@item
c05f749e
AM
5949Unary operations on an absolute address or number, and binary
5950operations on two absolute addresses or two numbers, or between one
5951absolute address and a number, apply the operator to the value(s).
5952@item
7542af2a
AM
5953Unary operations on a relative address, and binary operations on two
5954relative addresses in the same section or between one relative address
5955and a number, apply the operator to the offset part of the address(es).
5956@item
c05f749e
AM
5957Other binary operations, that is, between two relative addresses not
5958in the same section, or between a relative address and an absolute
5959address, first convert any non-absolute term to an absolute address
5960before applying the operator.
7542af2a
AM
5961@end itemize
5962
5963The result section of each sub-expression is as follows:
5964
5965@itemize @bullet
5966@item
5967An operation involving only numbers results in a number.
5968@item
5969The result of comparisons, @samp{&&} and @samp{||} is also a number.
5970@item
9bc8bb33 5971The result of other binary arithmetic and logical operations on two
11e7fd74 5972relative addresses in the same section or two absolute addresses
9bc8bb33
AM
5973(after above conversions) is also a number.
5974@item
5975The result of other operations on relative addresses or one
5976relative address and a number, is a relative address in the same
5977section as the relative operand(s).
7542af2a
AM
5978@item
5979The result of other operations on absolute addresses (after above
5980conversions) is an absolute address.
5981@end itemize
252b5132
RH
5982
5983You can use the builtin function @code{ABSOLUTE} to force an expression
5984to be absolute when it would otherwise be relative. For example, to
5985create an absolute symbol set to the address of the end of the output
5986section @samp{.data}:
5987@smallexample
5988SECTIONS
5989 @{
5990 .data : @{ *(.data) _edata = ABSOLUTE(.); @}
5991 @}
5992@end smallexample
5993@noindent
5994If @samp{ABSOLUTE} were not used, @samp{_edata} would be relative to the
5995@samp{.data} section.
5996
7542af2a
AM
5997Using @code{LOADADDR} also forces an expression absolute, since this
5998particular builtin function returns an absolute address.
5999
252b5132
RH
6000@node Builtin Functions
6001@subsection Builtin Functions
6002@cindex functions in expressions
6003The linker script language includes a number of builtin functions for
6004use in linker script expressions.
6005
6006@table @code
6007@item ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
6008@kindex ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
6009@cindex expression, absolute
6010Return the absolute (non-relocatable, as opposed to non-negative) value
6011of the expression @var{exp}. Primarily useful to assign an absolute
6012value to a symbol within a section definition, where symbol values are
6013normally section relative. @xref{Expression Section}.
6014
6015@item ADDR(@var{section})
6016@kindex ADDR(@var{section})
6017@cindex section address in expression
7542af2a 6018Return the address (VMA) of the named @var{section}. Your
252b5132 6019script must previously have defined the location of that section. In
7542af2a
AM
6020the following example, @code{start_of_output_1}, @code{symbol_1} and
6021@code{symbol_2} are assigned equivalent values, except that
6022@code{symbol_1} will be relative to the @code{.output1} section while
6023the other two will be absolute:
252b5132
RH
6024@smallexample
6025@group
6026SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6027 .output1 :
a1ab1d2a 6028 @{
252b5132
RH
6029 start_of_output_1 = ABSOLUTE(.);
6030 @dots{}
6031 @}
6032 .output :
6033 @{
6034 symbol_1 = ADDR(.output1);
6035 symbol_2 = start_of_output_1;
6036 @}
6037@dots{} @}
6038@end group
6039@end smallexample
6040
876f4090
NS
6041@item ALIGN(@var{align})
6042@itemx ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
6043@kindex ALIGN(@var{align})
6044@kindex ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
252b5132
RH
6045@cindex round up location counter
6046@cindex align location counter
876f4090
NS
6047@cindex round up expression
6048@cindex align expression
6049Return the location counter (@code{.}) or arbitrary expression aligned
6050to the next @var{align} boundary. The single operand @code{ALIGN}
6051doesn't change the value of the location counter---it just does
6052arithmetic on it. The two operand @code{ALIGN} allows an arbitrary
6053expression to be aligned upwards (@code{ALIGN(@var{align})} is
e0a3af22 6054equivalent to @code{ALIGN(ABSOLUTE(.), @var{align})}).
876f4090
NS
6055
6056Here is an example which aligns the output @code{.data} section to the
6057next @code{0x2000} byte boundary after the preceding section and sets a
6058variable within the section to the next @code{0x8000} boundary after the
6059input sections:
252b5132
RH
6060@smallexample
6061@group
6062SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6063 .data ALIGN(0x2000): @{
6064 *(.data)
6065 variable = ALIGN(0x8000);
6066 @}
6067@dots{} @}
6068@end group
6069@end smallexample
6070@noindent
6071The first use of @code{ALIGN} in this example specifies the location of
6072a section because it is used as the optional @var{address} attribute of
6073a section definition (@pxref{Output Section Address}). The second use
6074of @code{ALIGN} is used to defines the value of a symbol.
6075
6076The builtin function @code{NEXT} is closely related to @code{ALIGN}.
6077
362c1d1a
NS
6078@item ALIGNOF(@var{section})
6079@kindex ALIGNOF(@var{section})
6080@cindex section alignment
6081Return the alignment in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
6082been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
6083evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
6084the alignment of the @code{.output} section is stored as the first
6085value in that section.
6086@smallexample
6087@group
6088SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
6089 .output @{
6090 LONG (ALIGNOF (.output))
6091 @dots{}
6092 @}
6093@dots{} @}
6094@end group
6095@end smallexample
6096
252b5132
RH
6097@item BLOCK(@var{exp})
6098@kindex BLOCK(@var{exp})
6099This is a synonym for @code{ALIGN}, for compatibility with older linker
6100scripts. It is most often seen when setting the address of an output
6101section.
6102
2d20f7bf
JJ
6103@item DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
6104@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
6105This is equivalent to either
6106@smallexample
6107(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - 1)))
6108@end smallexample
6109or
6110@smallexample
6111(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - @var{commonpagesize})))
6112@end smallexample
6113@noindent
6114depending on whether the latter uses fewer @var{commonpagesize} sized pages
6115for the data segment (area between the result of this expression and
6116@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}) than the former or not.
6117If the latter form is used, it means @var{commonpagesize} bytes of runtime
6118memory will be saved at the expense of up to @var{commonpagesize} wasted
6119bytes in the on-disk file.
6120
6121This expression can only be used directly in @code{SECTIONS} commands, not in
6122any output section descriptions and only once in the linker script.
6123@var{commonpagesize} should be less or equal to @var{maxpagesize} and should
6124be the system page size the object wants to be optimized for (while still
6125working on system page sizes up to @var{maxpagesize}).
6126
6127@noindent
6128Example:
6129@smallexample
6130 . = DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(0x10000, 0x2000);
6131@end smallexample
6132
6133@item DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
6134@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
6135This defines the end of data segment for @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN}
6136evaluation purposes.
6137
6138@smallexample
6139 . = DATA_SEGMENT_END(.);
6140@end smallexample
6141
a4f5ad88
JJ
6142@item DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
6143@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
6144This defines the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment when
eec2f3ed 6145@samp{-z relro} option is used.
a4f5ad88
JJ
6146When @samp{-z relro} option is not present, @code{DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END}
6147does nothing, otherwise @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} is padded so that
6148@var{exp} + @var{offset} is aligned to the most commonly used page
6149boundary for particular target. If present in the linker script,
6150it must always come in between @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} and
eec2f3ed
AM
6151@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}. Evaluates to the second argument plus any
6152padding needed at the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment due to
6153section alignment.
a4f5ad88
JJ
6154
6155@smallexample
6156 . = DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(24, .);
6157@end smallexample
6158
252b5132
RH
6159@item DEFINED(@var{symbol})
6160@kindex DEFINED(@var{symbol})
6161@cindex symbol defaults
6162Return 1 if @var{symbol} is in the linker global symbol table and is
420e579c
HPN
6163defined before the statement using DEFINED in the script, otherwise
6164return 0. You can use this function to provide
252b5132
RH
6165default values for symbols. For example, the following script fragment
6166shows how to set a global symbol @samp{begin} to the first location in
6167the @samp{.text} section---but if a symbol called @samp{begin} already
6168existed, its value is preserved:
6169
6170@smallexample
6171@group
6172SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6173 .text : @{
6174 begin = DEFINED(begin) ? begin : . ;
6175 @dots{}
6176 @}
6177 @dots{}
6178@}
6179@end group
6180@end smallexample
6181
3ec57632
NC
6182@item LENGTH(@var{memory})
6183@kindex LENGTH(@var{memory})
6184Return the length of the memory region named @var{memory}.
6185
252b5132
RH
6186@item LOADADDR(@var{section})
6187@kindex LOADADDR(@var{section})
6188@cindex section load address in expression
7542af2a 6189Return the absolute LMA of the named @var{section}. (@pxref{Output
252b5132
RH
6190Section LMA}).
6191
2e53f7d6
NC
6192@item LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
6193@kindex LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
6194Return the binary logarithm of @var{exp} rounded towards infinity.
6195@code{LOG2CEIL(0)} returns 0.
6196
252b5132
RH
6197@kindex MAX
6198@item MAX(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
6199Returns the maximum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
6200
6201@kindex MIN
6202@item MIN(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
6203Returns the minimum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
6204
6205@item NEXT(@var{exp})
6206@kindex NEXT(@var{exp})
6207@cindex unallocated address, next
6208Return the next unallocated address that is a multiple of @var{exp}.
6209This function is closely related to @code{ALIGN(@var{exp})}; unless you
6210use the @code{MEMORY} command to define discontinuous memory for the
6211output file, the two functions are equivalent.
6212
3ec57632
NC
6213@item ORIGIN(@var{memory})
6214@kindex ORIGIN(@var{memory})
6215Return the origin of the memory region named @var{memory}.
6216
ba916c8a
MM
6217@item SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
6218@kindex SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
6219Return the base address of the named @var{segment}. If an explicit
c5da8c7d
NC
6220value has already been given for this segment (with a command-line
6221@samp{-T} option) then that value will be returned otherwise the value
6222will be @var{default}. At present, the @samp{-T} command-line option
6223can only be used to set the base address for the ``text'', ``data'', and
7542af2a 6224``bss'' sections, but you can use @code{SEGMENT_START} with any segment
ba916c8a
MM
6225name.
6226
252b5132
RH
6227@item SIZEOF(@var{section})
6228@kindex SIZEOF(@var{section})
6229@cindex section size
6230Return the size in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
6231been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
6232evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
6233@code{symbol_1} and @code{symbol_2} are assigned identical values:
6234@smallexample
6235@group
6236SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
6237 .output @{
6238 .start = . ;
6239 @dots{}
6240 .end = . ;
6241 @}
6242 symbol_1 = .end - .start ;
6243 symbol_2 = SIZEOF(.output);
6244@dots{} @}
6245@end group
6246@end smallexample
6247
6248@item SIZEOF_HEADERS
6249@itemx sizeof_headers
6250@kindex SIZEOF_HEADERS
6251@cindex header size
6252Return the size in bytes of the output file's headers. This is
6253information which appears at the start of the output file. You can use
6254this number when setting the start address of the first section, if you
6255choose, to facilitate paging.
6256
6257@cindex not enough room for program headers
6258@cindex program headers, not enough room
6259When producing an ELF output file, if the linker script uses the
6260@code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} builtin function, the linker must compute the
6261number of program headers before it has determined all the section
6262addresses and sizes. If the linker later discovers that it needs
6263additional program headers, it will report an error @samp{not enough
6264room for program headers}. To avoid this error, you must avoid using
6265the @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} function, or you must rework your linker
6266script to avoid forcing the linker to use additional program headers, or
6267you must define the program headers yourself using the @code{PHDRS}
6268command (@pxref{PHDRS}).
6269@end table
6270
6271@node Implicit Linker Scripts
6272@section Implicit Linker Scripts
6273@cindex implicit linker scripts
6274If you specify a linker input file which the linker can not recognize as
6275an object file or an archive file, it will try to read the file as a
6276linker script. If the file can not be parsed as a linker script, the
6277linker will report an error.
6278
6279An implicit linker script will not replace the default linker script.
6280
6281Typically an implicit linker script would contain only symbol
6282assignments, or the @code{INPUT}, @code{GROUP}, or @code{VERSION}
6283commands.
6284
6285Any input files read because of an implicit linker script will be read
6286at the position in the command line where the implicit linker script was
6287read. This can affect archive searching.
6288
6289@ifset GENERIC
6290@node Machine Dependent
6291@chapter Machine Dependent Features
6292
6293@cindex machine dependencies
ff5dcc92
SC
6294@command{ld} has additional features on some platforms; the following
6295sections describe them. Machines where @command{ld} has no additional
252b5132
RH
6296functionality are not listed.
6297
6298@menu
36f63dca
NC
6299@ifset H8300
6300* H8/300:: @command{ld} and the H8/300
6301@end ifset
6302@ifset I960
6303* i960:: @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family
6304@end ifset
7ca01ed9
NC
6305@ifset M68HC11
6306* M68HC11/68HC12:: @code{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6307@end ifset
36f63dca
NC
6308@ifset ARM
6309* ARM:: @command{ld} and the ARM family
6310@end ifset
6311@ifset HPPA
6312* HPPA ELF32:: @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF
6313@end ifset
7fb9f789
NC
6314@ifset M68K
6315* M68K:: @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
6316@end ifset
833794fc
MR
6317@ifset MIPS
6318* MIPS:: @command{ld} and the MIPS family
6319@end ifset
3c3bdf30 6320@ifset MMIX
36f63dca 6321* MMIX:: @command{ld} and MMIX
3c3bdf30 6322@end ifset
2469cfa2 6323@ifset MSP430
36f63dca 6324* MSP430:: @command{ld} and MSP430
2469cfa2 6325@end ifset
35c08157
KLC
6326@ifset NDS32
6327* NDS32:: @command{ld} and NDS32
6328@end ifset
78058a5e
SL
6329@ifset NIOSII
6330* Nios II:: @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
6331@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
6332@ifset POWERPC
6333* PowerPC ELF32:: @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
6334@end ifset
6335@ifset POWERPC64
6336* PowerPC64 ELF64:: @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
6337@end ifset
49fa1e15
AM
6338@ifset SPU
6339* SPU ELF:: @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
6340@end ifset
74459f0e 6341@ifset TICOFF
ff5dcc92 6342* TI COFF:: @command{ld} and TI COFF
74459f0e 6343@end ifset
2ca22b03
NC
6344@ifset WIN32
6345* WIN32:: @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
6346@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
6347@ifset XTENSA
6348* Xtensa:: @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors
6349@end ifset
252b5132
RH
6350@end menu
6351@end ifset
6352
252b5132
RH
6353@ifset H8300
6354@ifclear GENERIC
6355@raisesections
6356@end ifclear
6357
6358@node H8/300
ff5dcc92 6359@section @command{ld} and the H8/300
252b5132
RH
6360
6361@cindex H8/300 support
ff5dcc92 6362For the H8/300, @command{ld} can perform these global optimizations when
252b5132
RH
6363you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6364
6365@table @emph
6366@cindex relaxing on H8/300
6367@item relaxing address modes
ff5dcc92 6368@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
252b5132
RH
6369targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6370program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6371respectively.
6372
6373@cindex synthesizing on H8/300
6374@item synthesizing instructions
81f5558e 6375@c FIXME: specifically mov.b, or any mov instructions really? -> mov.b only, at least on H8, H8H, H8S
ff5dcc92 6376@command{ld} finds all @code{mov.b} instructions which use the
252b5132
RH
6377sixteen-bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
6378page of memory, and changes them to use the eight-bit address form.
6379(That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:16} into
6380@samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in the
6381top page of memory).
1502569c 6382
81f5558e
NC
6383@command{ld} finds all @code{mov} instructions which use the register
6384indirect with 32-bit displacement addressing mode, but use a small
6385displacement inside 16-bit displacement range, and changes them to use
6386the 16-bit displacement form. (That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b
6387@code{@@}@var{d}:32,ERx} into @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{d}:16,ERx}
6388whenever the displacement @var{d} is in the 16 bit signed integer
6389range. Only implemented in ELF-format ld).
6390
1502569c 6391@item bit manipulation instructions
c0065db7 6392@command{ld} finds all bit manipulation instructions like @code{band, bclr,
1502569c 6393biand, bild, bior, bist, bixor, bld, bnot, bor, bset, bst, btst, bxor}
c0065db7 6394which use 32 bit and 16 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
1502569c
NC
6395page of memory, and changes them to use the 8 bit address form.
6396(That is: the linker turns @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:32} into
c0065db7 6397@samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
1502569c
NC
6398the top page of memory).
6399
6400@item system control instructions
c0065db7
RM
6401@command{ld} finds all @code{ldc.w, stc.w} instructions which use the
640232 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top page of memory, and
1502569c
NC
6403changes them to use 16 bit address form.
6404(That is: the linker turns @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:32,ccr} into
c0065db7 6405@samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:16,ccr} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
1502569c 6406the top page of memory).
252b5132
RH
6407@end table
6408
6409@ifclear GENERIC
6410@lowersections
6411@end ifclear
6412@end ifset
6413
36f63dca 6414@ifclear GENERIC
c2dcd04e 6415@ifset Renesas
36f63dca 6416@c This stuff is pointless to say unless you're especially concerned
c2dcd04e
NC
6417@c with Renesas chips; don't enable it for generic case, please.
6418@node Renesas
6419@chapter @command{ld} and Other Renesas Chips
36f63dca 6420
c2dcd04e
NC
6421@command{ld} also supports the Renesas (formerly Hitachi) H8/300H,
6422H8/500, and SH chips. No special features, commands, or command-line
6423options are required for these chips.
36f63dca
NC
6424@end ifset
6425@end ifclear
6426
6427@ifset I960
6428@ifclear GENERIC
6429@raisesections
6430@end ifclear
6431
6432@node i960
6433@section @command{ld} and the Intel 960 Family
6434
6435@cindex i960 support
6436
6437You can use the @samp{-A@var{architecture}} command line option to
6438specify one of the two-letter names identifying members of the 960
6439family; the option specifies the desired output target, and warns of any
6440incompatible instructions in the input files. It also modifies the
6441linker's search strategy for archive libraries, to support the use of
6442libraries specific to each particular architecture, by including in the
6443search loop names suffixed with the string identifying the architecture.
6444
6445For example, if your @command{ld} command line included @w{@samp{-ACA}} as
6446well as @w{@samp{-ltry}}, the linker would look (in its built-in search
6447paths, and in any paths you specify with @samp{-L}) for a library with
6448the names
6449
6450@smallexample
6451@group
6452try
6453libtry.a
6454tryca
6455libtryca.a
6456@end group
6457@end smallexample
6458
6459@noindent
6460The first two possibilities would be considered in any event; the last
6461two are due to the use of @w{@samp{-ACA}}.
6462
6463You can meaningfully use @samp{-A} more than once on a command line, since
6464the 960 architecture family allows combination of target architectures; each
6465use will add another pair of name variants to search for when @w{@samp{-l}}
6466specifies a library.
6467
6468@cindex @option{--relax} on i960
6469@cindex relaxing on i960
6470@command{ld} supports the @samp{--relax} option for the i960 family. If
6471you specify @samp{--relax}, @command{ld} finds all @code{balx} and
6472@code{calx} instructions whose targets are within 24 bits, and turns
6473them into 24-bit program-counter relative @code{bal} and @code{cal}
6474instructions, respectively. @command{ld} also turns @code{cal}
6475instructions into @code{bal} instructions when it determines that the
6476target subroutine is a leaf routine (that is, the target subroutine does
6477not itself call any subroutines).
6478
6479@ifclear GENERIC
6480@lowersections
6481@end ifclear
6482@end ifset
6483
6484@ifset ARM
6485@ifclear GENERIC
6486@raisesections
6487@end ifclear
6488
93fd0973
SC
6489@ifset M68HC11
6490@ifclear GENERIC
6491@raisesections
6492@end ifclear
6493
6494@node M68HC11/68HC12
6495@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6496
6497@cindex M68HC11 and 68HC12 support
6498
6499@subsection Linker Relaxation
6500
6501For the Motorola 68HC11, @command{ld} can perform these global
6502optimizations when you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6503
6504@table @emph
6505@cindex relaxing on M68HC11
6506@item relaxing address modes
6507@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
6508targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6509program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6510respectively.
6511
6512@command{ld} also looks at all 16-bit extended addressing modes and
6513transforms them in a direct addressing mode when the address is in
6514page 0 (between 0 and 0x0ff).
6515
6516@item relaxing gcc instruction group
6517When @command{gcc} is called with @option{-mrelax}, it can emit group
6518of instructions that the linker can optimize to use a 68HC11 direct
6519addressing mode. These instructions consists of @code{bclr} or
6520@code{bset} instructions.
6521
6522@end table
6523
6524@subsection Trampoline Generation
6525
6526@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC11
6527@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC12
6528For 68HC11 and 68HC12, @command{ld} can generate trampoline code to
6529call a far function using a normal @code{jsr} instruction. The linker
c0065db7 6530will also change the relocation to some far function to use the
93fd0973
SC
6531trampoline address instead of the function address. This is typically the
6532case when a pointer to a function is taken. The pointer will in fact
6533point to the function trampoline.
6534
6535@ifclear GENERIC
6536@lowersections
6537@end ifclear
6538@end ifset
6539
36f63dca 6540@node ARM
3674e28a 6541@section @command{ld} and the ARM family
36f63dca
NC
6542
6543@cindex ARM interworking support
6544@kindex --support-old-code
6545For the ARM, @command{ld} will generate code stubs to allow functions calls
b45619c0 6546between ARM and Thumb code. These stubs only work with code that has
36f63dca
NC
6547been compiled and assembled with the @samp{-mthumb-interwork} command
6548line option. If it is necessary to link with old ARM object files or
6549libraries, which have not been compiled with the -mthumb-interwork
6550option then the @samp{--support-old-code} command line switch should be
6551given to the linker. This will make it generate larger stub functions
6552which will work with non-interworking aware ARM code. Note, however,
6553the linker does not support generating stubs for function calls to
6554non-interworking aware Thumb code.
6555
6556@cindex thumb entry point
6557@cindex entry point, thumb
6558@kindex --thumb-entry=@var{entry}
6559The @samp{--thumb-entry} switch is a duplicate of the generic
6560@samp{--entry} switch, in that it sets the program's starting address.
6561But it also sets the bottom bit of the address, so that it can be
6562branched to using a BX instruction, and the program will start
6563executing in Thumb mode straight away.
6564
ce11ba6c
KT
6565@cindex PE import table prefixing
6566@kindex --use-nul-prefixed-import-tables
6567The @samp{--use-nul-prefixed-import-tables} switch is specifying, that
6568the import tables idata4 and idata5 have to be generated with a zero
11e7fd74 6569element prefix for import libraries. This is the old style to generate
ce11ba6c
KT
6570import tables. By default this option is turned off.
6571
e489d0ae
PB
6572@cindex BE8
6573@kindex --be8
6574The @samp{--be8} switch instructs @command{ld} to generate BE8 format
080bb7bb
NC
6575executables. This option is only valid when linking big-endian
6576objects - ie ones which have been assembled with the @option{-EB}
6577option. The resulting image will contain big-endian data and
6578little-endian code.
e489d0ae 6579
3674e28a
PB
6580@cindex TARGET1
6581@kindex --target1-rel
6582@kindex --target1-abs
6583The @samp{R_ARM_TARGET1} relocation is typically used for entries in the
6584@samp{.init_array} section. It is interpreted as either @samp{R_ARM_REL32}
6585or @samp{R_ARM_ABS32}, depending on the target. The @samp{--target1-rel}
6586and @samp{--target1-abs} switches override the default.
6587
6588@cindex TARGET2
6589@kindex --target2=@var{type}
6590The @samp{--target2=type} switch overrides the default definition of the
6591@samp{R_ARM_TARGET2} relocation. Valid values for @samp{type}, their
6592meanings, and target defaults are as follows:
6593@table @samp
6594@item rel
eeac373a
PB
6595@samp{R_ARM_REL32} (arm*-*-elf, arm*-*-eabi)
6596@item abs
6597@samp{R_ARM_ABS32} (arm*-*-symbianelf)
3674e28a
PB
6598@item got-rel
6599@samp{R_ARM_GOT_PREL} (arm*-*-linux, arm*-*-*bsd)
6600@end table
6601
319850b4
JB
6602@cindex FIX_V4BX
6603@kindex --fix-v4bx
6604The @samp{R_ARM_V4BX} relocation (defined by the ARM AAELF
6605specification) enables objects compiled for the ARMv4 architecture to be
6606interworking-safe when linked with other objects compiled for ARMv4t, but
6607also allows pure ARMv4 binaries to be built from the same ARMv4 objects.
6608
6609In the latter case, the switch @option{--fix-v4bx} must be passed to the
6610linker, which causes v4t @code{BX rM} instructions to be rewritten as
6611@code{MOV PC,rM}, since v4 processors do not have a @code{BX} instruction.
6612
6613In the former case, the switch should not be used, and @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6614relocations are ignored.
6615
845b51d6
PB
6616@cindex FIX_V4BX_INTERWORKING
6617@kindex --fix-v4bx-interworking
6618Replace @code{BX rM} instructions identified by @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6619relocations with a branch to the following veneer:
6620
6621@smallexample
6622TST rM, #1
6623MOVEQ PC, rM
6624BX Rn
6625@end smallexample
6626
6627This allows generation of libraries/applications that work on ARMv4 cores
6628and are still interworking safe. Note that the above veneer clobbers the
11e7fd74 6629condition flags, so may cause incorrect program behavior in rare cases.
845b51d6 6630
33bfe774
JB
6631@cindex USE_BLX
6632@kindex --use-blx
6633The @samp{--use-blx} switch enables the linker to use ARM/Thumb
6634BLX instructions (available on ARMv5t and above) in various
6635situations. Currently it is used to perform calls via the PLT from Thumb
6636code using BLX rather than using BX and a mode-switching stub before
6637each PLT entry. This should lead to such calls executing slightly faster.
6638
6639This option is enabled implicitly for SymbianOS, so there is no need to
6640specify it if you are using that target.
6641
c6dd86c6
JB
6642@cindex VFP11_DENORM_FIX
6643@kindex --vfp11-denorm-fix
6644The @samp{--vfp11-denorm-fix} switch enables a link-time workaround for a
6645bug in certain VFP11 coprocessor hardware, which sometimes allows
6646instructions with denorm operands (which must be handled by support code)
6647to have those operands overwritten by subsequent instructions before
6648the support code can read the intended values.
6649
6650The bug may be avoided in scalar mode if you allow at least one
6651intervening instruction between a VFP11 instruction which uses a register
6652and another instruction which writes to the same register, or at least two
6653intervening instructions if vector mode is in use. The bug only affects
6654full-compliance floating-point mode: you do not need this workaround if
6655you are using "runfast" mode. Please contact ARM for further details.
6656
6657If you know you are using buggy VFP11 hardware, you can
6658enable this workaround by specifying the linker option
6659@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=scalar} if you are using the VFP11 scalar
6660mode only, or @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=vector} if you are using
6661vector mode (the latter also works for scalar code). The default is
6662@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=none}.
6663
6664If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
6665potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
6666such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists of the
6667first instruction of the sequence and a branch back to the subsequent
6668instruction. The original instruction is then replaced with a branch to
6669the veneer. The extra cycles required to call and return from the veneer
6670are sufficient to avoid the erratum in both the scalar and vector cases.
6671
2de70689
MGD
6672@cindex ARM1176 erratum workaround
6673@kindex --fix-arm1176
6674@kindex --no-fix-arm1176
9d5777a3
RM
6675The @samp{--fix-arm1176} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum
6676in certain ARM1176 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you
6677are targeting ARM v6 (excluding ARM v6T2) or earlier. It can be disabled
2de70689
MGD
6678unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-arm1176}.
6679
9d5777a3 6680Further information is available in the ``ARM1176JZ-S and ARM1176JZF-S
11e7fd74 6681Programmer Advice Notice'' available on the ARM documentation website at:
2de70689
MGD
6682http://infocenter.arm.com/.
6683
bf21ed78
MS
6684@cindex NO_ENUM_SIZE_WARNING
6685@kindex --no-enum-size-warning
726150b7 6686The @option{--no-enum-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
bf21ed78
MS
6687warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6688enumeration size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6689linking of an object file using 32-bit enumeration values with another
6690using enumeration values fitted into the smallest possible space will
6691not be diagnosed.
a9dc9481
JM
6692
6693@cindex NO_WCHAR_SIZE_WARNING
6694@kindex --no-wchar-size-warning
6695The @option{--no-wchar-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
6696warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6697@code{wchar_t} size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6698linking of an object file using 32-bit @code{wchar_t} values with another
6699using 16-bit @code{wchar_t} values will not be diagnosed.
bf21ed78 6700
726150b7
NC
6701@cindex PIC_VENEER
6702@kindex --pic-veneer
6703The @samp{--pic-veneer} switch makes the linker use PIC sequences for
6704ARM/Thumb interworking veneers, even if the rest of the binary
6705is not PIC. This avoids problems on uClinux targets where
6706@samp{--emit-relocs} is used to generate relocatable binaries.
6707
6708@cindex STUB_GROUP_SIZE
6709@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
6710The linker will automatically generate and insert small sequences of
6711code into a linked ARM ELF executable whenever an attempt is made to
6712perform a function call to a symbol that is too far away. The
6713placement of these sequences of instructions - called stubs - is
6714controlled by the command line option @option{--stub-group-size=N}.
6715The placement is important because a poor choice can create a need for
11e7fd74 6716duplicate stubs, increasing the code size. The linker will try to
726150b7
NC
6717group stubs together in order to reduce interruptions to the flow of
6718code, but it needs guidance as to how big these groups should be and
6719where they should be placed.
6720
6721The value of @samp{N}, the parameter to the
6722@option{--stub-group-size=} option controls where the stub groups are
07d72278 6723placed. If it is negative then all stubs are placed after the first
726150b7
NC
6724branch that needs them. If it is positive then the stubs can be
6725placed either before or after the branches that need them. If the
6726value of @samp{N} is 1 (either +1 or -1) then the linker will choose
6727exactly where to place groups of stubs, using its built in heuristics.
6728A value of @samp{N} greater than 1 (or smaller than -1) tells the
6729linker that a single group of stubs can service at most @samp{N} bytes
6730from the input sections.
6731
6732The default, if @option{--stub-group-size=} is not specified, is
6733@samp{N = +1}.
6734
1a51c1a4
NC
6735Farcalls stubs insertion is fully supported for the ARM-EABI target
6736only, because it relies on object files properties not present
6737otherwise.
6738
1db37fe6
YG
6739@cindex Cortex-A8 erratum workaround
6740@kindex --fix-cortex-a8
6741@kindex --no-fix-cortex-a8
6742The @samp{--fix-cortex-a8} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum in certain Cortex-A8 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you are targeting the ARM v7-A architecture profile. It can be enabled otherwise by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a8}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a8}.
6743
6744The erratum only affects Thumb-2 code. Please contact ARM for further details.
6745
68fcca92
JW
6746@cindex Cortex-A53 erratum 835769 workaround
6747@kindex --fix-cortex-a53-835769
6748@kindex --no-fix-cortex-a53-835769
6749The @samp{--fix-cortex-a53-835769} switch enables a link-time workaround for erratum 835769 present on certain early revisions of Cortex-A53 processors. The workaround is disabled by default. It can be enabled by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a53-835769}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a53-835769}.
6750
6751Please contact ARM for further details.
6752
1db37fe6
YG
6753@kindex --merge-exidx-entries
6754@kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
6755@cindex Merging exidx entries
6756The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent exidx entries in debuginfo.
6757
6758@kindex --long-plt
6759@cindex 32-bit PLT entries
6760The @samp{--long-plt} option enables the use of 16 byte PLT entries
6761which support up to 4Gb of code. The default is to use 12 byte PLT
6762entries which only support 512Mb of code.
6763
36f63dca
NC
6764@ifclear GENERIC
6765@lowersections
6766@end ifclear
6767@end ifset
6768
6769@ifset HPPA
6770@ifclear GENERIC
6771@raisesections
6772@end ifclear
6773
6774@node HPPA ELF32
6775@section @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF Support
6776@cindex HPPA multiple sub-space stubs
6777@kindex --multi-subspace
6778When generating a shared library, @command{ld} will by default generate
6779import stubs suitable for use with a single sub-space application.
6780The @samp{--multi-subspace} switch causes @command{ld} to generate export
6781stubs, and different (larger) import stubs suitable for use with
6782multiple sub-spaces.
6783
6784@cindex HPPA stub grouping
6785@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
6786Long branch stubs and import/export stubs are placed by @command{ld} in
6787stub sections located between groups of input sections.
6788@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
6789sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
6790a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
6791the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
6792conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
6793prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
6794A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
6795branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
6796@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
6797@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
6798detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
6799positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
6800
6801Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
6802single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
6803create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
6804large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
6805
6806@ifclear GENERIC
6807@lowersections
6808@end ifclear
6809@end ifset
6810
7fb9f789
NC
6811@ifset M68K
6812@ifclear GENERIC
6813@raisesections
6814@end ifclear
6815
6816@node M68K
6817@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
6818
6819@cindex Motorola 68K GOT generation
6820@kindex --got=@var{type}
6821The @samp{--got=@var{type}} option lets you choose the GOT generation scheme.
6822The choices are @samp{single}, @samp{negative}, @samp{multigot} and
6823@samp{target}. When @samp{target} is selected the linker chooses
6824the default GOT generation scheme for the current target.
6825@samp{single} tells the linker to generate a single GOT with
6826entries only at non-negative offsets.
6827@samp{negative} instructs the linker to generate a single GOT with
6828entries at both negative and positive offsets. Not all environments
6829support such GOTs.
6830@samp{multigot} allows the linker to generate several GOTs in the
6831output file. All GOT references from a single input object
6832file access the same GOT, but references from different input object
6833files might access different GOTs. Not all environments support such GOTs.
6834
6835@ifclear GENERIC
6836@lowersections
6837@end ifclear
6838@end ifset
6839
833794fc
MR
6840@ifset MIPS
6841@ifclear GENERIC
6842@raisesections
6843@end ifclear
6844
6845@node MIPS
6846@section @command{ld} and the MIPS family
6847
6848@cindex MIPS microMIPS instruction choice selection
6849@kindex --insn32
6850@kindex --no-insn32
6851The @samp{--insn32} and @samp{--no-insn32} options control the choice of
6852microMIPS instructions used in code generated by the linker, such as that
6853in the PLT or lazy binding stubs, or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is
6854used, then the linker only uses 32-bit instruction encodings. By default
6855or if @samp{--no-insn32} is used, all instruction encodings are used,
6856including 16-bit ones where possible.
6857
6858@ifclear GENERIC
6859@lowersections
6860@end ifclear
6861@end ifset
6862
36f63dca
NC
6863@ifset MMIX
6864@ifclear GENERIC
6865@raisesections
6866@end ifclear
6867
6868@node MMIX
6869@section @code{ld} and MMIX
6870For MMIX, there is a choice of generating @code{ELF} object files or
6871@code{mmo} object files when linking. The simulator @code{mmix}
6872understands the @code{mmo} format. The binutils @code{objcopy} utility
6873can translate between the two formats.
6874
6875There is one special section, the @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section.
6876Contents in this section is assumed to correspond to that of global
6877registers, and symbols referring to it are translated to special symbols,
6878equal to registers. In a final link, the start address of the
6879@samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section corresponds to the first allocated
6880global register multiplied by 8. Register @code{$255} is not included in
6881this section; it is always set to the program entry, which is at the
6882symbol @code{Main} for @code{mmo} files.
6883
7a2de473
HPN
6884Global symbols with the prefix @code{__.MMIX.start.}, for example
6885@code{__.MMIX.start..text} and @code{__.MMIX.start..data} are special.
6886The default linker script uses these to set the default start address
6887of a section.
36f63dca
NC
6888
6889Initial and trailing multiples of zero-valued 32-bit words in a section,
6890are left out from an mmo file.
6891
6892@ifclear GENERIC
6893@lowersections
6894@end ifclear
6895@end ifset
6896
6897@ifset MSP430
6898@ifclear GENERIC
6899@raisesections
6900@end ifclear
6901
6902@node MSP430
6903@section @code{ld} and MSP430
6904For the MSP430 it is possible to select the MPU architecture. The flag @samp{-m [mpu type]}
6905will select an appropriate linker script for selected MPU type. (To get a list of known MPUs
6906just pass @samp{-m help} option to the linker).
6907
6908@cindex MSP430 extra sections
6909The linker will recognize some extra sections which are MSP430 specific:
6910
6911@table @code
6912@item @samp{.vectors}
6913Defines a portion of ROM where interrupt vectors located.
6914
6915@item @samp{.bootloader}
6916Defines the bootloader portion of the ROM (if applicable). Any code
6917in this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
6918
6919@item @samp{.infomem}
6920Defines an information memory section (if applicable). Any code in
6921this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
6922
c0065db7 6923@item @samp{.infomemnobits}
36f63dca
NC
6924This is the same as the @samp{.infomem} section except that any code
6925in this section will not be uploaded to the MPU.
6926
6927@item @samp{.noinit}
6928Denotes a portion of RAM located above @samp{.bss} section.
6929
c0065db7 6930The last two sections are used by gcc.
36f63dca
NC
6931@end table
6932
6933@ifclear GENERIC
6934@lowersections
6935@end ifclear
6936@end ifset
6937
35c08157
KLC
6938@ifset NDS32
6939@ifclear GENERIC
6940@raisesections
6941@end ifclear
6942
6943@node NDS32
6944@section @code{ld} and NDS32
6945@kindex relaxing on NDS32
6946For NDS32, there are some options to select relaxation behavior. The linker
6947relaxes objects according to these options.
6948
6949@table @code
6950@item @samp{--m[no-]fp-as-gp}
6951Disable/enable fp-as-gp relaxation.
6952
6953@item @samp{--mexport-symbols=FILE}
6954Exporting symbols and their address into FILE as linker script.
6955
6956@item @samp{--m[no-]ex9}
6957Disable/enable link-time EX9 relaxation.
6958
6959@item @samp{--mexport-ex9=FILE}
6960Export the EX9 table after linking.
6961
6962@item @samp{--mimport-ex9=FILE}
6963Import the Ex9 table for EX9 relaxation.
6964
6965@item @samp{--mupdate-ex9}
6966Update the existing EX9 table.
6967
6968@item @samp{--mex9-limit=NUM}
6969Maximum number of entries in the ex9 table.
6970
6971@item @samp{--mex9-loop-aware}
6972Avoid generating the EX9 instruction inside the loop.
6973
6974@item @samp{--m[no-]ifc}
6975Disable/enable the link-time IFC optimization.
6976
6977@item @samp{--mifc-loop-aware}
6978Avoid generating the IFC instruction inside the loop.
6979@end table
6980
6981@ifclear GENERIC
6982@lowersections
6983@end ifclear
6984@end ifset
6985
78058a5e
SL
6986@ifset NIOSII
6987@ifclear GENERIC
6988@raisesections
6989@end ifclear
6990
6991@node Nios II
6992@section @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
6993@cindex Nios II call relaxation
6994@kindex --relax on Nios II
6995
6996Call and immediate jump instructions on Nios II processors are limited to
6997transferring control to addresses in the same 256MB memory segment,
6998which may result in @command{ld} giving
6999@samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
7000The command-line option @option{--relax} enables the generation of
7001trampolines that can access the entire 32-bit address space for calls
7002outside the normal @code{call} and @code{jmpi} address range. These
7003trampolines are inserted at section boundaries, so may not themselves
7004be reachable if an input section and its associated call trampolines are
7005larger than 256MB.
7006
7007The @option{--relax} option is enabled by default unless @option{-r}
7008is also specified. You can disable trampoline generation by using the
7009@option{--no-relax} linker option. You can also disable this optimization
7010locally by using the @samp{set .noat} directive in assembly-language
7011source files, as the linker-inserted trampolines use the @code{at}
7012register as a temporary.
7013
7014Note that the linker @option{--relax} option is independent of assembler
7015relaxation options, and that using the GNU assembler's @option{-relax-all}
7016option interferes with the linker's more selective call instruction relaxation.
7017
7018@ifclear GENERIC
7019@lowersections
7020@end ifclear
7021@end ifset
7022
2a60a7a8
AM
7023@ifset POWERPC
7024@ifclear GENERIC
7025@raisesections
7026@end ifclear
7027
7028@node PowerPC ELF32
7029@section @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
7030@cindex PowerPC long branches
7031@kindex --relax on PowerPC
7032Branches on PowerPC processors are limited to a signed 26-bit
7033displacement, which may result in @command{ld} giving
7034@samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
7035@samp{--relax} enables the generation of trampolines that can access
7036the entire 32-bit address space. These trampolines are inserted at
7037section boundaries, so may not themselves be reachable if an input
c8a1f254
NS
7038section exceeds 33M in size. You may combine @samp{-r} and
7039@samp{--relax} to add trampolines in a partial link. In that case
7040both branches to undefined symbols and inter-section branches are also
7041considered potentially out of range, and trampolines inserted.
2a60a7a8
AM
7042
7043@cindex PowerPC ELF32 options
7044@table @option
7045@cindex PowerPC PLT
7046@kindex --bss-plt
7047@item --bss-plt
7048Current PowerPC GCC accepts a @samp{-msecure-plt} option that
7049generates code capable of using a newer PLT and GOT layout that has
7050the security advantage of no executable section ever needing to be
7051writable and no writable section ever being executable. PowerPC
7052@command{ld} will generate this layout, including stubs to access the
7053PLT, if all input files (including startup and static libraries) were
7054compiled with @samp{-msecure-plt}. @samp{--bss-plt} forces the old
7055BSS PLT (and GOT layout) which can give slightly better performance.
7056
016687f8
AM
7057@kindex --secure-plt
7058@item --secure-plt
7059@command{ld} will use the new PLT and GOT layout if it is linking new
7060@samp{-fpic} or @samp{-fPIC} code, but does not do so automatically
7061when linking non-PIC code. This option requests the new PLT and GOT
7062layout. A warning will be given if some object file requires the old
7063style BSS PLT.
7064
2a60a7a8
AM
7065@cindex PowerPC GOT
7066@kindex --sdata-got
7067@item --sdata-got
7068The new secure PLT and GOT are placed differently relative to other
7069sections compared to older BSS PLT and GOT placement. The location of
7070@code{.plt} must change because the new secure PLT is an initialized
7071section while the old PLT is uninitialized. The reason for the
7072@code{.got} change is more subtle: The new placement allows
7073@code{.got} to be read-only in applications linked with
7074@samp{-z relro -z now}. However, this placement means that
7075@code{.sdata} cannot always be used in shared libraries, because the
7076PowerPC ABI accesses @code{.sdata} in shared libraries from the GOT
7077pointer. @samp{--sdata-got} forces the old GOT placement. PowerPC
7078GCC doesn't use @code{.sdata} in shared libraries, so this option is
7079really only useful for other compilers that may do so.
7080
7081@cindex PowerPC stub symbols
7082@kindex --emit-stub-syms
7083@item --emit-stub-syms
7084This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
7085symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7086
7087@cindex PowerPC TLS optimization
7088@kindex --no-tls-optimize
7089@item --no-tls-optimize
7090PowerPC @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
7091sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
7092disable the optimization.
7093@end table
7094
7095@ifclear GENERIC
7096@lowersections
7097@end ifclear
7098@end ifset
7099
7100@ifset POWERPC64
7101@ifclear GENERIC
7102@raisesections
7103@end ifclear
7104
7105@node PowerPC64 ELF64
7106@section @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
7107
7108@cindex PowerPC64 ELF64 options
7109@table @option
7110@cindex PowerPC64 stub grouping
7111@kindex --stub-group-size
7112@item --stub-group-size
7113Long branch stubs, PLT call stubs and TOC adjusting stubs are placed
7114by @command{ld} in stub sections located between groups of input sections.
7115@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
7116sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
7117a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
7118the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
7119conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
7120prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
7121A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
7122branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
7123@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
7124@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
7125detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
7126positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
7127
7128Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
7129single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
7130create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
7131large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
7132
7133@cindex PowerPC64 stub symbols
7134@kindex --emit-stub-syms
7135@item --emit-stub-syms
7136This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
7137symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7138
7139@cindex PowerPC64 dot symbols
7140@kindex --dotsyms
7141@kindex --no-dotsyms
95421fb9
AM
7142@item --dotsyms
7143@itemx --no-dotsyms
2a60a7a8
AM
7144These two options control how @command{ld} interprets version patterns
7145in a version script. Older PowerPC64 compilers emitted both a
7146function descriptor symbol with the same name as the function, and a
7147code entry symbol with the name prefixed by a dot (@samp{.}). To
7148properly version a function @samp{foo}, the version script thus needs
7149to control both @samp{foo} and @samp{.foo}. The option
7150@samp{--dotsyms}, on by default, automatically adds the required
7151dot-prefixed patterns. Use @samp{--no-dotsyms} to disable this
7152feature.
7153
7ae4ea7d
AM
7154@cindex PowerPC64 register save/restore functions
7155@kindex --save-restore-funcs
7156@kindex --no-save-restore-funcs
95421fb9
AM
7157@item --save-restore-funcs
7158@itemx --no-save-restore-funcs
7ae4ea7d
AM
7159These two options control whether PowerPC64 @command{ld} automatically
7160provides out-of-line register save and restore functions used by
7161@samp{-Os} code. The default is to provide any such referenced
7162function for a normal final link, and to not do so for a relocatable
7163link.
7164
2a60a7a8
AM
7165@cindex PowerPC64 TLS optimization
7166@kindex --no-tls-optimize
7167@item --no-tls-optimize
7168PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
7169sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
7170disable the optimization.
7171
7c9cf415
AM
7172@cindex PowerPC64 __tls_get_addr optimization
7173@kindex --tls-get-addr-optimize
7174@kindex --no-tls-get-addr-optimize
95421fb9
AM
7175@item --tls-get-addr-optimize
7176@itemx --no-tls-get-addr-optimize
7c9cf415
AM
7177These options control whether PowerPC64 @command{ld} uses a special
7178stub to call __tls_get_addr. PowerPC64 glibc 2.22 and later support
7179an optimization that allows the second and subsequent calls to
7180@code{__tls_get_addr} for a given symbol to be resolved by the special
7181stub without calling in to glibc. By default the linker enables this
7182option when glibc advertises the availability of __tls_get_addr_opt.
7183Forcing this option on when using an older glibc won't do much besides
7184slow down your applications, but may be useful if linking an
7185application against an older glibc with the expectation that it will
7186normally be used on systems having a newer glibc.
7187
2a60a7a8
AM
7188@cindex PowerPC64 OPD optimization
7189@kindex --no-opd-optimize
7190@item --no-opd-optimize
7191PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes @code{.opd} section entries
7192corresponding to deleted link-once functions, or functions removed by
e7fc76dd 7193the action of @samp{--gc-sections} or linker script @code{/DISCARD/}.
2a60a7a8
AM
7194Use this option to disable @code{.opd} optimization.
7195
7196@cindex PowerPC64 OPD spacing
7197@kindex --non-overlapping-opd
7198@item --non-overlapping-opd
7199Some PowerPC64 compilers have an option to generate compressed
7200@code{.opd} entries spaced 16 bytes apart, overlapping the third word,
7201the static chain pointer (unused in C) with the first word of the next
7202entry. This option expands such entries to the full 24 bytes.
7203
7204@cindex PowerPC64 TOC optimization
7205@kindex --no-toc-optimize
7206@item --no-toc-optimize
7207PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes unused @code{.toc} section
7208entries. Such entries are detected by examining relocations that
7209reference the TOC in code sections. A reloc in a deleted code section
7210marks a TOC word as unneeded, while a reloc in a kept code section
7211marks a TOC word as needed. Since the TOC may reference itself, TOC
7212relocs are also examined. TOC words marked as both needed and
7213unneeded will of course be kept. TOC words without any referencing
7214reloc are assumed to be part of a multi-word entry, and are kept or
7215discarded as per the nearest marked preceding word. This works
7216reliably for compiler generated code, but may be incorrect if assembly
7217code is used to insert TOC entries. Use this option to disable the
7218optimization.
7219
7220@cindex PowerPC64 multi-TOC
7221@kindex --no-multi-toc
7222@item --no-multi-toc
794e51c0
AM
7223If given any toc option besides @code{-mcmodel=medium} or
7224@code{-mcmodel=large}, PowerPC64 GCC generates code for a TOC model
7225where TOC
2a60a7a8
AM
7226entries are accessed with a 16-bit offset from r2. This limits the
7227total TOC size to 64K. PowerPC64 @command{ld} extends this limit by
7228grouping code sections such that each group uses less than 64K for its
7229TOC entries, then inserts r2 adjusting stubs between inter-group
7230calls. @command{ld} does not split apart input sections, so cannot
7231help if a single input file has a @code{.toc} section that exceeds
723264K, most likely from linking multiple files with @command{ld -r}.
7233Use this option to turn off this feature.
794e51c0
AM
7234
7235@cindex PowerPC64 TOC sorting
7236@kindex --no-toc-sort
7237@item --no-toc-sort
7238By default, @command{ld} sorts TOC sections so that those whose file
7239happens to have a section called @code{.init} or @code{.fini} are
7240placed first, followed by TOC sections referenced by code generated
7241with PowerPC64 gcc's @code{-mcmodel=small}, and lastly TOC sections
7242referenced only by code generated with PowerPC64 gcc's
7243@code{-mcmodel=medium} or @code{-mcmodel=large} options. Doing this
7244results in better TOC grouping for multi-TOC. Use this option to turn
7245off this feature.
7246
7247@cindex PowerPC64 PLT stub alignment
7248@kindex --plt-align
7249@kindex --no-plt-align
7250@item --plt-align
7251@itemx --no-plt-align
7252Use these options to control whether individual PLT call stubs are
e05fa0ba
AM
7253padded so that they don't cross a 32-byte boundary, or to the
7254specified power of two boundary when using @code{--plt-align=}. Note
7255that this isn't alignment in the usual sense. By default PLT call
7256stubs are packed tightly.
794e51c0
AM
7257
7258@cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub static chain
7259@kindex --plt-static-chain
7260@kindex --no-plt-static-chain
7261@item --plt-static-chain
7262@itemx --no-plt-static-chain
7263Use these options to control whether PLT call stubs load the static
7264chain pointer (r11). @code{ld} defaults to not loading the static
7265chain since there is never any need to do so on a PLT call.
7266
7267@cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub thread safety
7268@kindex --plt-thread-safe
7269@kindex --no-plt-thread-safe
7270@item --plt-thread-safe
7271@itemx --no-thread-safe
7272With power7's weakly ordered memory model, it is possible when using
7273lazy binding for ld.so to update a plt entry in one thread and have
7274another thread see the individual plt entry words update in the wrong
7275order, despite ld.so carefully writing in the correct order and using
7276memory write barriers. To avoid this we need some sort of read
7277barrier in the call stub, or use LD_BIND_NOW=1. By default, @code{ld}
7278looks for calls to commonly used functions that create threads, and if
7279seen, adds the necessary barriers. Use these options to change the
7280default behaviour.
2a60a7a8
AM
7281@end table
7282
7283@ifclear GENERIC
7284@lowersections
7285@end ifclear
7286@end ifset
7287
49fa1e15
AM
7288@ifset SPU
7289@ifclear GENERIC
7290@raisesections
7291@end ifclear
7292
7293@node SPU ELF
7294@section @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
7295
7296@cindex SPU ELF options
7297@table @option
7298
7299@cindex SPU plugins
7300@kindex --plugin
7301@item --plugin
7302This option marks an executable as a PIC plugin module.
7303
7304@cindex SPU overlays
7305@kindex --no-overlays
7306@item --no-overlays
7307Normally, @command{ld} recognizes calls to functions within overlay
7308regions, and redirects such calls to an overlay manager via a stub.
7309@command{ld} also provides a built-in overlay manager. This option
7310turns off all this special overlay handling.
7311
7312@cindex SPU overlay stub symbols
7313@kindex --emit-stub-syms
7314@item --emit-stub-syms
7315This option causes @command{ld} to label overlay stubs with a local
7316symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7317
7318@cindex SPU extra overlay stubs
7319@kindex --extra-overlay-stubs
7320@item --extra-overlay-stubs
7321This option causes @command{ld} to add overlay call stubs on all
7322function calls out of overlay regions. Normally stubs are not added
7323on calls to non-overlay regions.
7324
7325@cindex SPU local store size
7326@kindex --local-store=lo:hi
7327@item --local-store=lo:hi
7328@command{ld} usually checks that a final executable for SPU fits in
7329the address range 0 to 256k. This option may be used to change the
7330range. Disable the check entirely with @option{--local-store=0:0}.
7331
c0065db7 7332@cindex SPU
49fa1e15
AM
7333@kindex --stack-analysis
7334@item --stack-analysis
7335SPU local store space is limited. Over-allocation of stack space
7336unnecessarily limits space available for code and data, while
7337under-allocation results in runtime failures. If given this option,
7338@command{ld} will provide an estimate of maximum stack usage.
7339@command{ld} does this by examining symbols in code sections to
7340determine the extents of functions, and looking at function prologues
7341for stack adjusting instructions. A call-graph is created by looking
7342for relocations on branch instructions. The graph is then searched
7343for the maximum stack usage path. Note that this analysis does not
7344find calls made via function pointers, and does not handle recursion
7345and other cycles in the call graph. Stack usage may be
7346under-estimated if your code makes such calls. Also, stack usage for
7347dynamic allocation, e.g. alloca, will not be detected. If a link map
7348is requested, detailed information about each function's stack usage
7349and calls will be given.
7350
c0065db7 7351@cindex SPU
49fa1e15
AM
7352@kindex --emit-stack-syms
7353@item --emit-stack-syms
7354This option, if given along with @option{--stack-analysis} will result
7355in @command{ld} emitting stack sizing symbols for each function.
7356These take the form @code{__stack_<function_name>} for global
7357functions, and @code{__stack_<number>_<function_name>} for static
7358functions. @code{<number>} is the section id in hex. The value of
7359such symbols is the stack requirement for the corresponding function.
7360The symbol size will be zero, type @code{STT_NOTYPE}, binding
c0065db7 7361@code{STB_LOCAL}, and section @code{SHN_ABS}.
49fa1e15
AM
7362@end table
7363
7364@ifclear GENERIC
7365@lowersections
7366@end ifclear
7367@end ifset
7368
36f63dca
NC
7369@ifset TICOFF
7370@ifclear GENERIC
7371@raisesections
7372@end ifclear
7373
7374@node TI COFF
7375@section @command{ld}'s Support for Various TI COFF Versions
7376@cindex TI COFF versions
7377@kindex --format=@var{version}
7378The @samp{--format} switch allows selection of one of the various
7379TI COFF versions. The latest of this writing is 2; versions 0 and 1 are
7380also supported. The TI COFF versions also vary in header byte-order
7381format; @command{ld} will read any version or byte order, but the output
7382header format depends on the default specified by the specific target.
7383
7384@ifclear GENERIC
7385@lowersections
7386@end ifclear
7387@end ifset
7388
2ca22b03
NC
7389@ifset WIN32
7390@ifclear GENERIC
7391@raisesections
7392@end ifclear
7393
7394@node WIN32
7395@section @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
7396
c0065db7 7397This section describes some of the win32 specific @command{ld} issues.
b45619c0 7398See @ref{Options,,Command Line Options} for detailed description of the
dc8465bf 7399command line options mentioned here.
2ca22b03
NC
7400
7401@table @emph
c0065db7
RM
7402@cindex import libraries
7403@item import libraries
69da35b5 7404The standard Windows linker creates and uses so-called import
2ca22b03 7405libraries, which contains information for linking to dll's. They are
69da35b5
NC
7406regular static archives and are handled as any other static
7407archive. The cygwin and mingw ports of @command{ld} have specific
2ca22b03
NC
7408support for creating such libraries provided with the
7409@samp{--out-implib} command line option.
7410
c0065db7
RM
7411@item exporting DLL symbols
7412@cindex exporting DLL symbols
dc8465bf
NC
7413The cygwin/mingw @command{ld} has several ways to export symbols for dll's.
7414
7415@table @emph
7416@item using auto-export functionality
7417@cindex using auto-export functionality
7418By default @command{ld} exports symbols with the auto-export functionality,
7419which is controlled by the following command line options:
7420
0a5d968e
NC
7421@itemize
7422@item --export-all-symbols [This is the default]
7423@item --exclude-symbols
7424@item --exclude-libs
e1c37eb5 7425@item --exclude-modules-for-implib
09e2aba4 7426@item --version-script
0a5d968e
NC
7427@end itemize
7428
09e2aba4
DK
7429When auto-export is in operation, @command{ld} will export all the non-local
7430(global and common) symbols it finds in a DLL, with the exception of a few
7431symbols known to belong to the system's runtime and libraries. As it will
7432often not be desirable to export all of a DLL's symbols, which may include
7433private functions that are not part of any public interface, the command-line
9d5777a3 7434options listed above may be used to filter symbols out from the list for
09e2aba4
DK
7435exporting. The @samp{--output-def} option can be used in order to see the
7436final list of exported symbols with all exclusions taken into effect.
7437
7438If @samp{--export-all-symbols} is not given explicitly on the
0a5d968e
NC
7439command line, then the default auto-export behavior will be @emph{disabled}
7440if either of the following are true:
7441
7442@itemize
7443@item A DEF file is used.
7444@item Any symbol in any object file was marked with the __declspec(dllexport) attribute.
7445@end itemize
dc8465bf 7446
c0065db7
RM
7447@item using a DEF file
7448@cindex using a DEF file
dc8465bf
NC
7449Another way of exporting symbols is using a DEF file. A DEF file is
7450an ASCII file containing definitions of symbols which should be
7451exported when a dll is created. Usually it is named @samp{<dll
7452name>.def} and is added as any other object file to the linker's
0a5d968e 7453command line. The file's name must end in @samp{.def} or @samp{.DEF}.
dc8465bf
NC
7454
7455@example
7456gcc -o <output> <objectfiles> <dll name>.def
7457@end example
7458
0a5d968e
NC
7459Using a DEF file turns off the normal auto-export behavior, unless the
7460@samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
7461
dc8465bf
NC
7462Here is an example of a DEF file for a shared library called @samp{xyz.dll}:
7463
7464@example
4b5bd4e7 7465LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x20000000
dc8465bf
NC
7466
7467EXPORTS
7468foo
7469bar
7470_bar = bar
4b5bd4e7
DS
7471another_foo = abc.dll.afoo
7472var1 DATA
7fcab871
KT
7473doo = foo == foo2
7474eoo DATA == var1
c0065db7 7475@end example
dc8465bf 7476
7fcab871 7477This example defines a DLL with a non-default base address and seven
4b5bd4e7
DS
7478symbols in the export table. The third exported symbol @code{_bar} is an
7479alias for the second. The fourth symbol, @code{another_foo} is resolved
7480by "forwarding" to another module and treating it as an alias for
7481@code{afoo} exported from the DLL @samp{abc.dll}. The final symbol
7fcab871
KT
7482@code{var1} is declared to be a data object. The @samp{doo} symbol in
7483export library is an alias of @samp{foo}, which gets the string name
7484in export table @samp{foo2}. The @samp{eoo} symbol is an data export
7485symbol, which gets in export table the name @samp{var1}.
4b5bd4e7 7486
6b31ad16
DS
7487The optional @code{LIBRARY <name>} command indicates the @emph{internal}
7488name of the output DLL. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix,
7489the default library suffix, @samp{.DLL} is appended.
7490
b45619c0
NC
7491When the .DEF file is used to build an application, rather than a
7492library, the @code{NAME <name>} command should be used instead of
6b31ad16 7493@code{LIBRARY}. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix, the default
c0065db7 7494executable suffix, @samp{.EXE} is appended.
6b31ad16
DS
7495
7496With either @code{LIBRARY <name>} or @code{NAME <name>} the optional
7497specification @code{BASE = <number>} may be used to specify a
c0065db7 7498non-default base address for the image.
6b31ad16
DS
7499
7500If neither @code{LIBRARY <name>} nor @code{NAME <name>} is specified,
a2877985
DS
7501or they specify an empty string, the internal name is the same as the
7502filename specified on the command line.
6b31ad16 7503
4b5bd4e7
DS
7504The complete specification of an export symbol is:
7505
7506@example
7507EXPORTS
7508 ( ( ( <name1> [ = <name2> ] )
7509 | ( <name1> = <module-name> . <external-name>))
7fcab871 7510 [ @@ <integer> ] [NONAME] [DATA] [CONSTANT] [PRIVATE] [== <name3>] ) *
c0065db7 7511@end example
4b5bd4e7
DS
7512
7513Declares @samp{<name1>} as an exported symbol from the DLL, or declares
7514@samp{<name1>} as an exported alias for @samp{<name2>}; or declares
7515@samp{<name1>} as a "forward" alias for the symbol
7516@samp{<external-name>} in the DLL @samp{<module-name>}.
7517Optionally, the symbol may be exported by the specified ordinal
7fcab871
KT
7518@samp{<integer>} alias. The optional @samp{<name3>} is the to be used
7519string in import/export table for the symbol.
4b5bd4e7
DS
7520
7521The optional keywords that follow the declaration indicate:
7522
7523@code{NONAME}: Do not put the symbol name in the DLL's export table. It
7524will still be exported by its ordinal alias (either the value specified
7525by the .def specification or, otherwise, the value assigned by the
7526linker). The symbol name, however, does remain visible in the import
7527library (if any), unless @code{PRIVATE} is also specified.
7528
7529@code{DATA}: The symbol is a variable or object, rather than a function.
7530The import lib will export only an indirect reference to @code{foo} as
7531the symbol @code{_imp__foo} (ie, @code{foo} must be resolved as
7532@code{*_imp__foo}).
7533
7534@code{CONSTANT}: Like @code{DATA}, but put the undecorated @code{foo} as
7535well as @code{_imp__foo} into the import library. Both refer to the
7536read-only import address table's pointer to the variable, not to the
7537variable itself. This can be dangerous. If the user code fails to add
7538the @code{dllimport} attribute and also fails to explicitly add the
7539extra indirection that the use of the attribute enforces, the
7540application will behave unexpectedly.
7541
7542@code{PRIVATE}: Put the symbol in the DLL's export table, but do not put
7543it into the static import library used to resolve imports at link time. The
7544symbol can still be imported using the @code{LoadLibrary/GetProcAddress}
7545API at runtime or by by using the GNU ld extension of linking directly to
7546the DLL without an import library.
c0065db7 7547
4b5bd4e7
DS
7548See ld/deffilep.y in the binutils sources for the full specification of
7549other DEF file statements
dc8465bf
NC
7550
7551@cindex creating a DEF file
7552While linking a shared dll, @command{ld} is able to create a DEF file
7553with the @samp{--output-def <file>} command line option.
0a5d968e
NC
7554
7555@item Using decorations
7556@cindex Using decorations
7557Another way of marking symbols for export is to modify the source code
7558itself, so that when building the DLL each symbol to be exported is
7559declared as:
7560
7561@example
7562__declspec(dllexport) int a_variable
7563__declspec(dllexport) void a_function(int with_args)
7564@end example
7565
7566All such symbols will be exported from the DLL. If, however,
7567any of the object files in the DLL contain symbols decorated in
7568this way, then the normal auto-export behavior is disabled, unless
7569the @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
7570
7571Note that object files that wish to access these symbols must @emph{not}
c0065db7 7572decorate them with dllexport. Instead, they should use dllimport,
0a5d968e
NC
7573instead:
7574
7575@example
7576__declspec(dllimport) int a_variable
7577__declspec(dllimport) void a_function(int with_args)
7578@end example
7579
c0065db7
RM
7580This complicates the structure of library header files, because
7581when included by the library itself the header must declare the
0a5d968e
NC
7582variables and functions as dllexport, but when included by client
7583code the header must declare them as dllimport. There are a number
c0065db7 7584of idioms that are typically used to do this; often client code can
0a5d968e
NC
7585omit the __declspec() declaration completely. See
7586@samp{--enable-auto-import} and @samp{automatic data imports} for more
b45619c0 7587information.
c0065db7 7588@end table
dc8465bf 7589
2ca22b03
NC
7590@cindex automatic data imports
7591@item automatic data imports
7592The standard Windows dll format supports data imports from dlls only
69da35b5 7593by adding special decorations (dllimport/dllexport), which let the
2ca22b03 7594compiler produce specific assembler instructions to deal with this
c0065db7 7595issue. This increases the effort necessary to port existing Un*x
69da35b5 7596code to these platforms, especially for large
2ca22b03 7597c++ libraries and applications. The auto-import feature, which was
c0065db7 7598initially provided by Paul Sokolovsky, allows one to omit the
b45619c0 7599decorations to achieve a behavior that conforms to that on POSIX/Un*x
c0065db7 7600platforms. This feature is enabled with the @samp{--enable-auto-import}
69da35b5
NC
7601command-line option, although it is enabled by default on cygwin/mingw.
7602The @samp{--enable-auto-import} option itself now serves mainly to
7603suppress any warnings that are ordinarily emitted when linked objects
7604trigger the feature's use.
7605
c0065db7 7606auto-import of variables does not always work flawlessly without
69da35b5
NC
7607additional assistance. Sometimes, you will see this message
7608
c0065db7 7609"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
69da35b5
NC
7610documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
7611
c0065db7
RM
7612The @samp{--enable-auto-import} documentation explains why this error
7613occurs, and several methods that can be used to overcome this difficulty.
7614One of these methods is the @emph{runtime pseudo-relocs} feature, described
69da35b5
NC
7615below.
7616
7617@cindex runtime pseudo-relocation
c0065db7
RM
7618For complex variables imported from DLLs (such as structs or classes),
7619object files typically contain a base address for the variable and an
7620offset (@emph{addend}) within the variable--to specify a particular
7621field or public member, for instance. Unfortunately, the runtime loader used
7622in win32 environments is incapable of fixing these references at runtime
69da35b5 7623without the additional information supplied by dllimport/dllexport decorations.
c0065db7 7624The standard auto-import feature described above is unable to resolve these
69da35b5
NC
7625references.
7626
c0065db7
RM
7627The @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} switch allows these references to
7628be resolved without error, while leaving the task of adjusting the references
7629themselves (with their non-zero addends) to specialized code provided by the
7630runtime environment. Recent versions of the cygwin and mingw environments and
7631compilers provide this runtime support; older versions do not. However, the
7632support is only necessary on the developer's platform; the compiled result will
69da35b5
NC
7633run without error on an older system.
7634
c0065db7
RM
7635@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is not the default; it must be explicitly
7636enabled as needed.
2ca22b03
NC
7637
7638@cindex direct linking to a dll
7639@item direct linking to a dll
7640The cygwin/mingw ports of @command{ld} support the direct linking,
7641including data symbols, to a dll without the usage of any import
69da35b5 7642libraries. This is much faster and uses much less memory than does the
b45619c0 7643traditional import library method, especially when linking large
c0065db7
RM
7644libraries or applications. When @command{ld} creates an import lib, each
7645function or variable exported from the dll is stored in its own bfd, even
7646though a single bfd could contain many exports. The overhead involved in
69da35b5 7647storing, loading, and processing so many bfd's is quite large, and explains the
c0065db7 7648tremendous time, memory, and storage needed to link against particularly
69da35b5
NC
7649large or complex libraries when using import libs.
7650
c0065db7 7651Linking directly to a dll uses no extra command-line switches other than
69da35b5 7652@samp{-L} and @samp{-l}, because @command{ld} already searches for a number
c0065db7 7653of names to match each library. All that is needed from the developer's
69da35b5
NC
7654perspective is an understanding of this search, in order to force ld to
7655select the dll instead of an import library.
7656
2ca22b03 7657
69da35b5
NC
7658For instance, when ld is called with the argument @samp{-lxxx} it will attempt
7659to find, in the first directory of its search path,
2ca22b03
NC
7660
7661@example
45e948fe
NC
7662libxxx.dll.a
7663xxx.dll.a
7664libxxx.a
7665xxx.lib
69da35b5 7666cygxxx.dll (*)
45e948fe
NC
7667libxxx.dll
7668xxx.dll
2ca22b03
NC
7669@end example
7670
69da35b5
NC
7671before moving on to the next directory in the search path.
7672
c0065db7
RM
7673(*) Actually, this is not @samp{cygxxx.dll} but in fact is @samp{<prefix>xxx.dll},
7674where @samp{<prefix>} is set by the @command{ld} option
7675@samp{--dll-search-prefix=<prefix>}. In the case of cygwin, the standard gcc spec
7676file includes @samp{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}, so in effect we actually search for
69da35b5
NC
7677@samp{cygxxx.dll}.
7678
c0065db7
RM
7679Other win32-based unix environments, such as mingw or pw32, may use other
7680@samp{<prefix>}es, although at present only cygwin makes use of this feature. It
69da35b5
NC
7681was originally intended to help avoid name conflicts among dll's built for the
7682various win32/un*x environments, so that (for example) two versions of a zlib dll
7683could coexist on the same machine.
7684
2ca22b03
NC
7685The generic cygwin/mingw path layout uses a @samp{bin} directory for
7686applications and dll's and a @samp{lib} directory for the import
69da35b5 7687libraries (using cygwin nomenclature):
2ca22b03
NC
7688
7689@example
7690bin/
7691 cygxxx.dll
7692lib/
7693 libxxx.dll.a (in case of dll's)
c0065db7 7694 libxxx.a (in case of static archive)
2ca22b03
NC
7695@end example
7696
c0065db7
RM
7697Linking directly to a dll without using the import library can be
7698done two ways:
2ca22b03
NC
7699
77001. Use the dll directly by adding the @samp{bin} path to the link line
7701@example
7702gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../bin/ -lxxx
c0065db7 7703@end example
2ca22b03 7704
69da35b5
NC
7705However, as the dll's often have version numbers appended to their names
7706(@samp{cygncurses-5.dll}) this will often fail, unless one specifies
7707@samp{-L../bin -lncurses-5} to include the version. Import libs are generally
7708not versioned, and do not have this difficulty.
7709
2ca22b03
NC
77102. Create a symbolic link from the dll to a file in the @samp{lib}
7711directory according to the above mentioned search pattern. This
7712should be used to avoid unwanted changes in the tools needed for
7713making the app/dll.
7714
7715@example
7716ln -s bin/cygxxx.dll lib/[cyg|lib|]xxx.dll[.a]
c0065db7 7717@end example
2ca22b03
NC
7718
7719Then you can link without any make environment changes.
7720
7721@example
7722gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../lib/ -lxxx
c0065db7 7723@end example
69da35b5
NC
7724
7725This technique also avoids the version number problems, because the following is
7726perfectly legal
7727
7728@example
7729bin/
7730 cygxxx-5.dll
7731lib/
c0065db7 7732 libxxx.dll.a -> ../bin/cygxxx-5.dll
69da35b5
NC
7733@end example
7734
dc8465bf 7735Linking directly to a dll without using an import lib will work
69da35b5
NC
7736even when auto-import features are exercised, and even when
7737@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is used.
7738
7739Given the improvements in speed and memory usage, one might justifiably
45e948fe 7740wonder why import libraries are used at all. There are three reasons:
69da35b5
NC
7741
77421. Until recently, the link-directly-to-dll functionality did @emph{not}
7743work with auto-imported data.
7744
dc8465bf
NC
77452. Sometimes it is necessary to include pure static objects within the
7746import library (which otherwise contains only bfd's for indirection
7747symbols that point to the exports of a dll). Again, the import lib
7748for the cygwin kernel makes use of this ability, and it is not
7749possible to do this without an import lib.
69da35b5 7750
45e948fe
NC
77513. Symbol aliases can only be resolved using an import lib. This is
7752critical when linking against OS-supplied dll's (eg, the win32 API)
7753in which symbols are usually exported as undecorated aliases of their
7754stdcall-decorated assembly names.
7755
69da35b5 7756So, import libs are not going away. But the ability to replace
c0065db7
RM
7757true import libs with a simple symbolic link to (or a copy of)
7758a dll, in many cases, is a useful addition to the suite of tools
7759binutils makes available to the win32 developer. Given the
69da35b5
NC
7760massive improvements in memory requirements during linking, storage
7761requirements, and linking speed, we expect that many developers
7762will soon begin to use this feature whenever possible.
dc8465bf 7763
c0065db7 7764@item symbol aliasing
dc8465bf 7765@table @emph
c0065db7
RM
7766@item adding additional names
7767Sometimes, it is useful to export symbols with additional names.
dc8465bf
NC
7768A symbol @samp{foo} will be exported as @samp{foo}, but it can also be
7769exported as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the DEF file
7770when creating the dll. This will affect also the optional created
c0065db7 7771import library. Consider the following DEF file:
dc8465bf 7772
c0065db7 7773@example
dc8465bf
NC
7774LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
7775
7776EXPORTS
c0065db7 7777foo
dc8465bf 7778_foo = foo
c0065db7 7779@end example
dc8465bf
NC
7780
7781The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the symbol @samp{foo} to @samp{_foo}.
7782
7783Another method for creating a symbol alias is to create it in the
7784source code using the "weak" attribute:
7785
c0065db7
RM
7786@example
7787void foo () @{ /* Do something. */; @}
dc8465bf 7788void _foo () __attribute__ ((weak, alias ("foo")));
c0065db7 7789@end example
dc8465bf
NC
7790
7791See the gcc manual for more information about attributes and weak
7792symbols.
7793
7794@item renaming symbols
7795Sometimes it is useful to rename exports. For instance, the cygwin
c0065db7 7796kernel does this regularly. A symbol @samp{_foo} can be exported as
dc8465bf
NC
7797@samp{foo} but not as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the
7798DEF file. (This will also affect the import library, if it is
c0065db7 7799created). In the following example:
dc8465bf 7800
c0065db7 7801@example
dc8465bf
NC
7802LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
7803
7804EXPORTS
7805_foo = foo
c0065db7 7806@end example
dc8465bf
NC
7807
7808The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the exported symbol @samp{foo} to
7809@samp{_foo}.
c0065db7 7810@end table
dc8465bf 7811
0a5d968e 7812Note: using a DEF file disables the default auto-export behavior,
c0065db7 7813unless the @samp{--export-all-symbols} command line option is used.
0a5d968e 7814If, however, you are trying to rename symbols, then you should list
c0065db7
RM
7815@emph{all} desired exports in the DEF file, including the symbols
7816that are not being renamed, and do @emph{not} use the
7817@samp{--export-all-symbols} option. If you list only the
7818renamed symbols in the DEF file, and use @samp{--export-all-symbols}
7819to handle the other symbols, then the both the new names @emph{and}
7820the original names for the renamed symbols will be exported.
7821In effect, you'd be aliasing those symbols, not renaming them,
0a5d968e 7822which is probably not what you wanted.
c87db184
CF
7823
7824@cindex weak externals
7825@item weak externals
7826The Windows object format, PE, specifies a form of weak symbols called
7827weak externals. When a weak symbol is linked and the symbol is not
7828defined, the weak symbol becomes an alias for some other symbol. There
7829are three variants of weak externals:
7830@itemize
7831@item Definition is searched for in objects and libraries, historically
7832called lazy externals.
7833@item Definition is searched for only in other objects, not in libraries.
7834This form is not presently implemented.
7835@item No search; the symbol is an alias. This form is not presently
7836implemented.
7837@end itemize
7838As a GNU extension, weak symbols that do not specify an alternate symbol
7839are supported. If the symbol is undefined when linking, the symbol
7840uses a default value.
c1711530
DK
7841
7842@cindex aligned common symbols
7843@item aligned common symbols
7844As a GNU extension to the PE file format, it is possible to specify the
7845desired alignment for a common symbol. This information is conveyed from
7846the assembler or compiler to the linker by means of GNU-specific commands
7847carried in the object file's @samp{.drectve} section, which are recognized
7848by @command{ld} and respected when laying out the common symbols. Native
7849tools will be able to process object files employing this GNU extension,
7850but will fail to respect the alignment instructions, and may issue noisy
7851warnings about unknown linker directives.
5063daf7 7852
2ca22b03
NC
7853@end table
7854
7855@ifclear GENERIC
7856@lowersections
7857@end ifclear
7858@end ifset
7859
e0001a05
NC
7860@ifset XTENSA
7861@ifclear GENERIC
7862@raisesections
7863@end ifclear
7864
7865@node Xtensa
7866@section @code{ld} and Xtensa Processors
7867
7868@cindex Xtensa processors
7869The default @command{ld} behavior for Xtensa processors is to interpret
7870@code{SECTIONS} commands so that lists of explicitly named sections in a
7871specification with a wildcard file will be interleaved when necessary to
7872keep literal pools within the range of PC-relative load offsets. For
7873example, with the command:
7874
7875@smallexample
7876SECTIONS
7877@{
7878 .text : @{
7879 *(.literal .text)
7880 @}
7881@}
7882@end smallexample
7883
7884@noindent
7885@command{ld} may interleave some of the @code{.literal}
7886and @code{.text} sections from different object files to ensure that the
7887literal pools are within the range of PC-relative load offsets. A valid
7888interleaving might place the @code{.literal} sections from an initial
7889group of files followed by the @code{.text} sections of that group of
7890files. Then, the @code{.literal} sections from the rest of the files
7891and the @code{.text} sections from the rest of the files would follow.
e0001a05 7892
43cd72b9 7893@cindex @option{--relax} on Xtensa
e0001a05 7894@cindex relaxing on Xtensa
43cd72b9
BW
7895Relaxation is enabled by default for the Xtensa version of @command{ld} and
7896provides two important link-time optimizations. The first optimization
7897is to combine identical literal values to reduce code size. A redundant
7898literal will be removed and all the @code{L32R} instructions that use it
7899will be changed to reference an identical literal, as long as the
7900location of the replacement literal is within the offset range of all
7901the @code{L32R} instructions. The second optimization is to remove
7902unnecessary overhead from assembler-generated ``longcall'' sequences of
7903@code{L32R}/@code{CALLX@var{n}} when the target functions are within
7904range of direct @code{CALL@var{n}} instructions.
7905
7906For each of these cases where an indirect call sequence can be optimized
7907to a direct call, the linker will change the @code{CALLX@var{n}}
7908instruction to a @code{CALL@var{n}} instruction, remove the @code{L32R}
7909instruction, and remove the literal referenced by the @code{L32R}
7910instruction if it is not used for anything else. Removing the
7911@code{L32R} instruction always reduces code size but can potentially
7912hurt performance by changing the alignment of subsequent branch targets.
7913By default, the linker will always preserve alignments, either by
7914switching some instructions between 24-bit encodings and the equivalent
7915density instructions or by inserting a no-op in place of the @code{L32R}
7916instruction that was removed. If code size is more important than
7917performance, the @option{--size-opt} option can be used to prevent the
7918linker from widening density instructions or inserting no-ops, except in
7919a few cases where no-ops are required for correctness.
7920
7921The following Xtensa-specific command-line options can be used to
7922control the linker:
7923
7924@cindex Xtensa options
7925@table @option
43cd72b9
BW
7926@item --size-opt
7927When optimizing indirect calls to direct calls, optimize for code size
7928more than performance. With this option, the linker will not insert
7929no-ops or widen density instructions to preserve branch target
7930alignment. There may still be some cases where no-ops are required to
7931preserve the correctness of the code.
7932@end table
e0001a05
NC
7933
7934@ifclear GENERIC
7935@lowersections
7936@end ifclear
7937@end ifset
7938
252b5132
RH
7939@ifclear SingleFormat
7940@node BFD
7941@chapter BFD
7942
7943@cindex back end
7944@cindex object file management
7945@cindex object formats available
7946@kindex objdump -i
7947The linker accesses object and archive files using the BFD libraries.
7948These libraries allow the linker to use the same routines to operate on
7949object files whatever the object file format. A different object file
7950format can be supported simply by creating a new BFD back end and adding
7951it to the library. To conserve runtime memory, however, the linker and
7952associated tools are usually configured to support only a subset of the
7953object file formats available. You can use @code{objdump -i}
7954(@pxref{objdump,,objdump,binutils.info,The GNU Binary Utilities}) to
7955list all the formats available for your configuration.
7956
7957@cindex BFD requirements
7958@cindex requirements for BFD
7959As with most implementations, BFD is a compromise between
7960several conflicting requirements. The major factor influencing
7961BFD design was efficiency: any time used converting between
7962formats is time which would not have been spent had BFD not
7963been involved. This is partly offset by abstraction payback; since
7964BFD simplifies applications and back ends, more time and care
7965may be spent optimizing algorithms for a greater speed.
7966
7967One minor artifact of the BFD solution which you should bear in
7968mind is the potential for information loss. There are two places where
7969useful information can be lost using the BFD mechanism: during
7970conversion and during output. @xref{BFD information loss}.
7971
7972@menu
7973* BFD outline:: How it works: an outline of BFD
7974@end menu
7975
7976@node BFD outline
36f63dca 7977@section How It Works: An Outline of BFD
252b5132
RH
7978@cindex opening object files
7979@include bfdsumm.texi
7980@end ifclear
7981
7982@node Reporting Bugs
7983@chapter Reporting Bugs
ff5dcc92
SC
7984@cindex bugs in @command{ld}
7985@cindex reporting bugs in @command{ld}
252b5132 7986
ff5dcc92 7987Your bug reports play an essential role in making @command{ld} reliable.
252b5132
RH
7988
7989Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or
7990it may not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is
ff5dcc92 7991to help the entire community by making the next version of @command{ld}
252b5132 7992work better. Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of
ff5dcc92 7993@command{ld}.
252b5132
RH
7994
7995In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
7996information that enables us to fix the bug.
7997
7998@menu
7999* Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug?
8000* Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs
8001@end menu
8002
8003@node Bug Criteria
36f63dca 8004@section Have You Found a Bug?
252b5132
RH
8005@cindex bug criteria
8006
8007If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
8008
8009@itemize @bullet
8010@cindex fatal signal
8011@cindex linker crash
8012@cindex crash of linker
8013@item
8014If the linker gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
ff5dcc92 8015@command{ld} bug. Reliable linkers never crash.
252b5132
RH
8016
8017@cindex error on valid input
8018@item
ff5dcc92 8019If @command{ld} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
252b5132
RH
8020
8021@cindex invalid input
8022@item
ff5dcc92 8023If @command{ld} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
252b5132
RH
8024may be a bug. In the general case, the linker can not verify that
8025object files are correct.
8026
8027@item
8028If you are an experienced user of linkers, your suggestions for
ff5dcc92 8029improvement of @command{ld} are welcome in any case.
252b5132
RH
8030@end itemize
8031
8032@node Bug Reporting
36f63dca 8033@section How to Report Bugs
252b5132 8034@cindex bug reports
ff5dcc92 8035@cindex @command{ld} bugs, reporting
252b5132
RH
8036
8037A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu}
ff5dcc92 8038products. If you obtained @command{ld} from a support organization, we
252b5132
RH
8039recommend you contact that organization first.
8040
8041You can find contact information for many support companies and
8042individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
8043distribution.
8044
ad22bfe8 8045@ifset BUGURL
ff5dcc92 8046Otherwise, send bug reports for @command{ld} to
ad22bfe8
JM
8047@value{BUGURL}.
8048@end ifset
252b5132
RH
8049
8050The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
8051@strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a
8052fact or leave it out, state it!
8053
8054Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the
8055problem and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might
b553b183
NC
8056assume that the name of a symbol you use in an example does not
8057matter. Well, probably it does not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps
8058the bug is a stray memory reference which happens to fetch from the
8059location where that name is stored in memory; perhaps, if the name
8060were different, the contents of that location would fool the linker
8061into doing the right thing despite the bug. Play it safe and give a
8062specific, complete example. That is the easiest thing for you to do,
c0065db7 8063and the most helpful.
b553b183
NC
8064
8065Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix
8066the bug if it is new to us. Therefore, always write your bug reports
8067on the assumption that the bug has not been reported previously.
252b5132
RH
8068
8069Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
36f63dca
NC
8070bell?'' This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless. We
8071respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.
8072You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
252b5132
RH
8073
8074To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
8075
8076@itemize @bullet
8077@item
ff5dcc92 8078The version of @command{ld}. @command{ld} announces it if you start it with
252b5132
RH
8079the @samp{--version} argument.
8080
8081Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
ff5dcc92 8082the bug in the current version of @command{ld}.
252b5132
RH
8083
8084@item
ff5dcc92 8085Any patches you may have applied to the @command{ld} source, including any
252b5132
RH
8086patches made to the @code{BFD} library.
8087
8088@item
8089The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
8090version number.
8091
8092@item
ff5dcc92 8093What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @command{ld}---e.g.
252b5132
RH
8094``@code{gcc-2.7}''.
8095
8096@item
8097The command arguments you gave the linker to link your example and
8098observe the bug. To guarantee you will not omit something important,
8099list them all. A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is
8100sufficient.
8101
8102If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
8103and then we might not encounter the bug.
8104
8105@item
8106A complete input file, or set of input files, that will reproduce the
b553b183
NC
8107bug. It is generally most helpful to send the actual object files
8108provided that they are reasonably small. Say no more than 10K. For
8109bigger files you can either make them available by FTP or HTTP or else
8110state that you are willing to send the object file(s) to whomever
8111requests them. (Note - your email will be going to a mailing list, so
8112we do not want to clog it up with large attachments). But small
8113attachments are best.
252b5132
RH
8114
8115If the source files were assembled using @code{gas} or compiled using
8116@code{gcc}, then it may be OK to send the source files rather than the
8117object files. In this case, be sure to say exactly what version of
8118@code{gas} or @code{gcc} was used to produce the object files. Also say
8119how @code{gas} or @code{gcc} were configured.
8120
8121@item
8122A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
8123incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
8124
ff5dcc92 8125Of course, if the bug is that @command{ld} gets a fatal signal, then we
252b5132
RH
8126will certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might
8127not notice unless it is glaringly wrong. You might as well not give us
8128a chance to make a mistake.
8129
8130Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still
8131say so explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your
b45619c0 8132copy of @command{ld} is out of sync, or you have encountered a bug in the
252b5132
RH
8133C library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy might crash
8134and ours would not. If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours
8135fails to crash, we would know that the bug was not happening for us. If
8136you had not told us to expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw
8137any conclusion from our observations.
8138
8139@item
ff5dcc92 8140If you wish to suggest changes to the @command{ld} source, send us context
252b5132
RH
8141diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or
8142@samp{-p} option. Always send diffs from the old file to the new file.
ff5dcc92 8143If you even discuss something in the @command{ld} source, refer to it by
252b5132
RH
8144context, not by line number.
8145
8146The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
8147sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
8148@end itemize
8149
8150Here are some things that are not necessary:
8151
8152@itemize @bullet
8153@item
8154A description of the envelope of the bug.
8155
8156Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
8157which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
8158changes will not affect it.
8159
8160This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
8161will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
8162with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
8163We recommend that you save your time for something else.
8164
8165Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
8166of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
8167output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
8168less time, and so on.
8169
8170However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
8171report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
8172
8173@item
8174A patch for the bug.
8175
8176A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit
8177the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
8178a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide
8179to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
8180
ff5dcc92 8181Sometimes with a program as complicated as @command{ld} it is very hard to
252b5132
RH
8182construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path
8183through the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be
8184able to construct one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is
8185fixed.
8186
8187And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
8188patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will
8189help us to understand.
8190
8191@item
8192A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
8193
8194Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such
8195things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
8196@end itemize
8197
8198@node MRI
8199@appendix MRI Compatible Script Files
8200@cindex MRI compatibility
ff5dcc92
SC
8201To aid users making the transition to @sc{gnu} @command{ld} from the MRI
8202linker, @command{ld} can use MRI compatible linker scripts as an
252b5132
RH
8203alternative to the more general-purpose linker scripting language
8204described in @ref{Scripts}. MRI compatible linker scripts have a much
8205simpler command set than the scripting language otherwise used with
ff5dcc92 8206@command{ld}. @sc{gnu} @command{ld} supports the most commonly used MRI
252b5132
RH
8207linker commands; these commands are described here.
8208
8209In general, MRI scripts aren't of much use with the @code{a.out} object
8210file format, since it only has three sections and MRI scripts lack some
8211features to make use of them.
8212
8213You can specify a file containing an MRI-compatible script using the
8214@samp{-c} command-line option.
8215
8216Each command in an MRI-compatible script occupies its own line; each
8217command line starts with the keyword that identifies the command (though
8218blank lines are also allowed for punctuation). If a line of an
ff5dcc92 8219MRI-compatible script begins with an unrecognized keyword, @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
8220issues a warning message, but continues processing the script.
8221
8222Lines beginning with @samp{*} are comments.
8223
8224You can write these commands using all upper-case letters, or all
8225lower case; for example, @samp{chip} is the same as @samp{CHIP}.
8226The following list shows only the upper-case form of each command.
8227
8228@table @code
8229@cindex @code{ABSOLUTE} (MRI)
8230@item ABSOLUTE @var{secname}
8231@itemx ABSOLUTE @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
ff5dcc92 8232Normally, @command{ld} includes in the output file all sections from all
252b5132
RH
8233the input files. However, in an MRI-compatible script, you can use the
8234@code{ABSOLUTE} command to restrict the sections that will be present in
8235your output program. If the @code{ABSOLUTE} command is used at all in a
8236script, then only the sections named explicitly in @code{ABSOLUTE}
8237commands will appear in the linker output. You can still use other
8238input sections (whatever you select on the command line, or using
8239@code{LOAD}) to resolve addresses in the output file.
8240
8241@cindex @code{ALIAS} (MRI)
8242@item ALIAS @var{out-secname}, @var{in-secname}
8243Use this command to place the data from input section @var{in-secname}
8244in a section called @var{out-secname} in the linker output file.
8245
8246@var{in-secname} may be an integer.
8247
8248@cindex @code{ALIGN} (MRI)
8249@item ALIGN @var{secname} = @var{expression}
8250Align the section called @var{secname} to @var{expression}. The
8251@var{expression} should be a power of two.
8252
8253@cindex @code{BASE} (MRI)
8254@item BASE @var{expression}
8255Use the value of @var{expression} as the lowest address (other than
8256absolute addresses) in the output file.
8257
8258@cindex @code{CHIP} (MRI)
8259@item CHIP @var{expression}
8260@itemx CHIP @var{expression}, @var{expression}
8261This command does nothing; it is accepted only for compatibility.
8262
8263@cindex @code{END} (MRI)
8264@item END
8265This command does nothing whatever; it's only accepted for compatibility.
8266
8267@cindex @code{FORMAT} (MRI)
8268@item FORMAT @var{output-format}
8269Similar to the @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command in the more general linker
a1ab1d2a 8270language, but restricted to one of these output formats:
252b5132
RH
8271
8272@enumerate
a1ab1d2a 8273@item
252b5132
RH
8274S-records, if @var{output-format} is @samp{S}
8275
8276@item
8277IEEE, if @var{output-format} is @samp{IEEE}
8278
8279@item
8280COFF (the @samp{coff-m68k} variant in BFD), if @var{output-format} is
8281@samp{COFF}
8282@end enumerate
8283
8284@cindex @code{LIST} (MRI)
8285@item LIST @var{anything}@dots{}
8286Print (to the standard output file) a link map, as produced by the
ff5dcc92 8287@command{ld} command-line option @samp{-M}.
252b5132
RH
8288
8289The keyword @code{LIST} may be followed by anything on the
8290same line, with no change in its effect.
8291
8292@cindex @code{LOAD} (MRI)
8293@item LOAD @var{filename}
8294@itemx LOAD @var{filename}, @var{filename}, @dots{} @var{filename}
8295Include one or more object file @var{filename} in the link; this has the
ff5dcc92 8296same effect as specifying @var{filename} directly on the @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
8297command line.
8298
8299@cindex @code{NAME} (MRI)
8300@item NAME @var{output-name}
ff5dcc92 8301@var{output-name} is the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; the
252b5132
RH
8302MRI-compatible command @code{NAME} is equivalent to the command-line
8303option @samp{-o} or the general script language command @code{OUTPUT}.
8304
8305@cindex @code{ORDER} (MRI)
8306@item ORDER @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
8307@itemx ORDER @var{secname} @var{secname} @var{secname}
ff5dcc92 8308Normally, @command{ld} orders the sections in its output file in the
252b5132
RH
8309order in which they first appear in the input files. In an MRI-compatible
8310script, you can override this ordering with the @code{ORDER} command. The
8311sections you list with @code{ORDER} will appear first in your output
8312file, in the order specified.
8313
8314@cindex @code{PUBLIC} (MRI)
8315@item PUBLIC @var{name}=@var{expression}
8316@itemx PUBLIC @var{name},@var{expression}
8317@itemx PUBLIC @var{name} @var{expression}
8318Supply a value (@var{expression}) for external symbol
8319@var{name} used in the linker input files.
8320
8321@cindex @code{SECT} (MRI)
8322@item SECT @var{secname}, @var{expression}
8323@itemx SECT @var{secname}=@var{expression}
8324@itemx SECT @var{secname} @var{expression}
8325You can use any of these three forms of the @code{SECT} command to
8326specify the start address (@var{expression}) for section @var{secname}.
8327If you have more than one @code{SECT} statement for the same
8328@var{secname}, only the @emph{first} sets the start address.
8329@end table
8330
793c5807
NC
8331@node GNU Free Documentation License
8332@appendix GNU Free Documentation License
36f63dca 8333@include fdl.texi
704c465c 8334
370b66a1
CD
8335@node LD Index
8336@unnumbered LD Index
252b5132
RH
8337
8338@printindex cp
8339
8340@tex
7ca01ed9 8341% I think something like @@colophon should be in texinfo. In the
252b5132
RH
8342% meantime:
8343\long\def\colophon{\hbox to0pt{}\vfill
8344\centerline{The body of this manual is set in}
8345\centerline{\fontname\tenrm,}
8346\centerline{with headings in {\bf\fontname\tenbf}}
8347\centerline{and examples in {\tt\fontname\tentt}.}
8348\centerline{{\it\fontname\tenit\/} and}
8349\centerline{{\sl\fontname\tensl\/}}
8350\centerline{are used for emphasis.}\vfill}
8351\page\colophon
7ca01ed9 8352% Blame: doc@@cygnus.com, 28mar91.
252b5132
RH
8353@end tex
8354
252b5132 8355@bye
This page took 1.200503 seconds and 4 git commands to generate.